- westside_bldgs a-d_v1.pdf · ls3p westside shoppes – buildings a-d ls3p 9103-146 340 orlando,...

08 OCTOBER 2015 VOLUME 01 - DIVISIONS 00-10

© 2015

PROJECT MANUAL

WESTSIDE SHOPPES

BUILDINGS A THROUGH D ORANGE COUNTY, FLORIDA

LS3P PROJECT NUMBER: 9103-146346

PERMIT SET

ARCHITECT

LS3P

227 W. TRADE STREET, SUITE 700

CHARLOTTE, NORTH CAROLINA 28202

PHONE: 704.333.6686; FAX: 704.333.2926

CONSULTANTS

CIVIL STRUCTURAL

KIMLEY-HORN TLC ENGINEERING FOR ARCHITECTURE

3660 MAGUIRE BLVD., SUITE 200 225 SOUTH ORANGE AVENUE

ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32803 SUITE 1600

PHONE: 407.898.1511 ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32801

PHONE: 407.841.9050; FAX: 407.425.7367

LANDSCAPE PME

HGOR TLC ENGINEERING FOR ARCHITECTURE

3445 PEACHTREE ROAD, NORTHEAST 225 SOUTH ORANGE AVENUE

SUITE 1425 SUITE 1600

ATLANTA, GEORGIA 30326 ORLANDO, FLORIDA 32801

PHONE: 404.248.1960; FAX: 404.248.1092 PHONE: 407.841.9050; FAX: 407.425.7367

Biram Lawrence

Date Stamp

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

LS3P Westside Shoppes – Buildings A-D LS3P 9103-146340 Orlando, Orange County, Florida PERMIT SET - 08 OCTOBER 2015

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 01

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREME NTS

003132 Geotechnical Data 006000 Forms 006313 Contractor's RFI Form 006325 Contractor's Request for Substitution Form

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

012300 Alternates 013300 Submittal Procedures Digital Data Letter of Agreement

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete 034900 Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Concrete

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

042200 Concrete Unit Masonry 042310 Calcium Silicate Masonry Veneer

DIVISION 05 - METALS

051200 Structural Steel Framing 052100 Steel Joist Framing 053100 Steel Decking 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 061600 Sheathing 066100 Fiberglass-Reinforced-Polyester (FRP) Fabrications

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071326 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 072100 Thermal Insulation 072413 Water Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS) 072600 Under-Slab Vapor Retarder 072726 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers 073213 Clay Roof Tiles 074113 Metal Roof Panels



075423 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 077100 Roof Specialties 077200 Roof Accessories 078100 Applied Fireproofing 078413 Penetration Firestopping 078446 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems 079200 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 083113 Access Doors and Frames 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 085113 Aluminum Windows 087100 Door Hardware (with Hardware Schedule) Hardware Catalog Cut Sheets 088000 Glazing 088700 Glazing Surface Films 089000 Louvers

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing 092900 Gypsum Board 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceiling 095428 Fiber Cement Ceilings 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring 099113 Exterior Painting

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

101400 Signage 102800 Toilet Accessories 104400 Fire Protection Specialties 107313 Fabric Awnings and Canopies 107316 Metal Canopies 107423 Cupola

DIVISION 11-14 – NOT USED



VOLUME 02

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

210500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 211313 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

220500 Common Work Results for Plumbing 220519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 220523 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220700 Plumbing Insulation 221116 Domestic Water Piping 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 221316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 221323 Sanitary Waste Interceptors 221413 Storm Drainage Piping 221423 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties 223300 Electric Domestic Water Heaters 224000 Plumbing Fixtures

DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITION ING

230010 Basic Mechanical Requirements 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 230548.13 Vibration Controls for HVAC 230553 Identification for HVAC Equipment 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 230713 Duct Insulation 231123 Facility Natural-Gas Piping 233113 Metal Ducts 233300 Air Duct Accessories 233423 HVAC Power Ventilators 233713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 237413 Packaged, Outdoor Heat Pump Unit 238216.14 Electric Resistance Air Coils 238239.19 Wall and Ceiling Unit Heaters

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

260010 Basic Electrical Requirements 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260543 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems



260923 Lighting Control Devices 262416 Panelboards 262726 Wiring Devices 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 265600 Exterior Lighting

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS – NOT USED

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

283111 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

313116 Termite Control

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

328400 Landscape Irrigation 329200 Exterior Landscape

APPENDIX

• Report of Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Analysis, May 1, 2015

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


GEOTECHNICAL DATA 003132 - 1

DOCUMENT 003132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA

1.1 GEOTECHNICAL DATA

A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.

B. A Report of Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Exploration Analysis for Project, prepared by ECS Florida, LLC, dated May 1, 2015 is appended to this Document.

END OF DOCUMENT 003132


FORMS 006000 - 1

DOCUMENT 006000 - FORMS

1.1 FORM OF AGREEMENT

A. The following form of Owner/Contractor Agreement and form of the General Conditions shall be used for Project:

1. AIA Document A102, "Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, Cost Plus Fee, Guaranteed Maximum Price."

2. AIA Document A133, "Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, Construction Manager as Constructor, Guaranteed Maximum Price."

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE FORMS

A. Administrative Forms: Additional administrative forms are specified in Division 01 General Requirements.

B. Copies of AIA standard forms may be obtained from the American Institute of Architects; http://www.aia.org/contractdocs/purchase/index.htm; [email protected]; (800) 942-7732.

C. Preconstruction Forms:

1. Form of Performance Bond and Labor and Material Bond: AIA Document A312, "Performance Bond and Payment Bond."

2. Form of Certificate of Insurance: AIA Document G715, "Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance 25-S."

D. Information and Modification Forms:

1. Form for Requests for Information (RFIs): AIA Document G716, "Request for Information (RFI)."

2. Form of Request for Proposal: AIA Document G709, "Work Changes Proposal Request." 3. Change Order Form: AIA Document G701, "Change Order." 4. Form of Architect's Memorandum for Minor Changes in the Work:

AIA Document G707, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 5. Form of Change Directive: AIA Document G714, "Construction Change Directive."

E. Payment Forms:

1. Schedule of Values Form: AIA Document G703, "Continuation Sheet." 2. Payment Application: AIA Document G702/703, "Application and Certificate for

Payment and Continuation Sheet." 3. Form of Contractor's Affidavit: AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment

of Debts and Claims." 4. Form of Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of

Payment of Release of Liens."


FORMS 006000 - 2

5. Form of Consent of Surety: AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."



CONTRACTOR'S RFI FORM 006313 - 1

CONTRACTOR'S RFI FORM

Project: Westside Shoppes, Buildings A-D 9103-146340 RFI # :

To: LS3P Date:

227 W. Trade Street, Suite 700

Charlotte, NC 28202

Contractor:

Attn.: Sandra Grzemski By:

Phone: (704) 333-6686 Voice:

Fax: (704) 333-2926 Fax:

Email: [email protected] Email:

Related Section & Paragraph # :

Related Drawings/Details:

Contractor’s Inquiry:

Contractor’s Recommended Solution:

Attachments:

Architect’s response requested by:

Architect’s Response:

Signed: Date:

Attachments:

Distribution:



CONTRACTORS REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION FORM 006325 - 1

DOCUMENT 006325 - CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION FORM

Project: Westside Shoppes, Buildings A-D Project No.: 9103-146340

To: LS3P Specification Section #:

227 W. Trade Street, Suite 700

Charlotte, NC 28202 Contractor:

Attn.: Sandra Grzemski Requested by:

Phone: (704) 333-6686 Phone:

Fax: (704) 333-2926 Fax:

Email: [email protected] Email:

Reason for not providing specified item:

Savings to Owner for accepting substitution:

Specified Product/Fabrication Method (List name/description; model no.; manufacturer):

Required Information for Specified Product: Attached:

Point by Point Comparative Product Data

Tests

Reports

Fabrication Drawings

Samples (Where Applicable)

Proposed Product/Fabrication Method (List trade name/description; model no.; manufacturer) :

Required Information for Proposed Product: Attached:

Point by Point Comparative Product Data (Required)

Tests

Reports

Fabrication Drawings

Samples (Where Applicable)

List of Related Changes/Modifications:

Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:

Proposed product/fabrication method affects other parts of the Work No Yes: Explain


CONTRACTORS REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION FORM 006325 - 2

Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified

product as utilized for this project, except as noted herein. • Qualifications of manufacturer, installer, and other specified parties meet the specified qualifications. • Same special warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source for replacement parts, as applicable, is available as that specified. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances, except as noted herein. • Proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications

indicated. • Failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results will not be considered grounds for additional payment

or time.

For the Bidder:

Submitted by:

Signed:

Firm:

Telephone:

Fax:

Email:

For the Manufacturer :

Submitted by:

Signed:

Firm:

Telephone:

Fax:

Email:



ALTERNATES 012300 - 1

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.


ALTERNATES 012300 - 2

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: Glazing.

1. Base Bid: Provide “Guardian SunGuard SuperNeutral 68/28” glazing as shown on the Drawings and specified in Section 088000 "Glazing..

2. Alternate: In lieu of base bid glazing selection, provide “Guardian SunGuard SuperNeutral 62/27".

END OF SECTION 012300


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.



2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

B. Closeout Submittal List: Submit a list of warranties, operation and maintenance manuals, and other closeout documents, arranged in Division/Section order as listed in the Project Manual.

1. Refer to Sample Close Out Table of Contents Document provided. 2. Provide Table of Contents for Project Close Out document to the Architect for review,

within 90 days of Notice to Proceed.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.



B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals

may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

C. Paper Submittals: Unless otherwise indicated, paper copies are not acceptable.

A. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall be Specification Section number followed by a hyphen and then a sequential number and name (e.g. .081113-01 HM Doors and Frames). Resubmittals shall include a digital suffix after another hyphen (e.g., 081113-01-01 HM Doors and Frames).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project information management system.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:

a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name.

B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

C. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested



by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Information Management System specifically established for Project. a. Architect will annotate file and return when review is complete.

2. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:



a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or Manufacturer’s standard printed data or details.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:


D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:



a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:



1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format:


F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.



R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.



B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file [and] [ three] <Insert number> paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, annotate to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:

1. No Exceptions Taken: The work covered by the submittal may proceed.

2. Note Markings: The work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with both the Architect’s notations and corrections on the submittal and the Contract Documents.

3. Rejected: Do not proceed with the Work covered by the submittal. Prepare a new submittal for a product that complies with the contract document.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will return it, noting “No Action Taken.” If it does not comply with requirements, Architect will return it noting “Revise and Resubmit.” Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.



D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review, with notation “Revise and Resubmit”.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action, with notation “No Action Taken”.


ARCHITECTURE INTERIOR ARCHITECTURE PLANNING: CHARLESTON COLUMBIA GREENVILLE CHARLOTTE RALEIGH WILMINGTON LS3P.COM

DIGITAL DATA LETTER OF AGREEMENT

An Agreement Between the Architect and _____________ (the “Transferee,”

either Original or Third Party, as the case may be) for Transfer of Digital Data

Architect: LS3P ASSOCIATES LTD. Transferee:

Original __

3rd Party __

434 Fayetteville Street,

Suite 1700

Raleigh, NC 27601-1701

Contact:

Project No.: 9103-146340

Project Name: WESTSIDE SHOPPES BUILDINGS A-D

Location: ORANGE COUNTY, FLORIDA

Date:

The Architect will provide the following Digital Data, dated as of the particular transmission, to the Transferee for

information purposes only (NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION, COST ESTIMATES, OR FABRICATION):

1. AutoCAD Version 2010 translated from REVIT file:

a) 1 Plan per level per discipline

b) Individual sheets, partial plans, elevations sections

and details will not be translated.

Digital Data was prepared using the following:

Software: AutoCAD (.dwg) Version: 2010

Digital Data to be delivered via the following media: Newforma Website posting

Transferee shall pay the Architect a service fee of $____ and other good and valuable consideration.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

1. The Architect and its consultants make no representation as to the compatibility of the Digital Data with any

hardware or software. The Transferee shall notify the Architect within five (5) business days of any problems

associated with accessing and/or using the Digital Data.

2. The Transferee acknowledges and agrees that the Digital Data may change or degrade during the transfer process.

The Transferee acknowledges and agrees that the Architect and its consultants may remove all indications of

ownership from the Digital Data prior to transmission.

3. All Digital Data shall be considered the property of the Architect and/or its consultants and shall not be used for

other Projects, for additions to this Project, or for completion of this Project without the prior written permission of

the Architect and/or its consultants. Digital Data shall not be re-transmitted by the Original Transferee to a Third

Party Transferee without prior execution of an agreement identical to this Agreement between the Architect, the

Original Transferee, and the Third Party Transferee. Under no circumstances shall the transmission of the Digital Data

be considered a sale of goods or a sale of copyrights.


4. THE ARCHITECT AND THE ARCHITECT’S CONSULTANTS HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES,

BOTH EXPRESS AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AS WELL AS ANY WARRANTY OF

ACCURACY, COMPLETENESS, AND/OR PERMANENCE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE

DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. Addenda information and/or revisions made to the most current Digital Data

after any date of transmission may not have been incorporated into the transmitted Digital Data. In the event of a

conflict between the Architect’s printed instruments of service (whether sealed or not) and the Digital Data, the

printed instruments of service shall govern. The Transferee acknowledges and agrees that the duty to determine the

existence of any and all conflicts between the Digital Data and any other information upon which the Transferee relies

rests solely upon the Transferee. The Digital Data shall not be considered Contract Documents or Construction

Documents as defined by any General Conditions of Contract for Construction. The Digital Data is being provided on a

strictly “AS IS” basis.

5. The use and/or provision of the Digital Data prepared by the Architect and/or its consultants shall not in any way

reduce or obviate the Transferee’s duty to check and coordinate dimensions, details, and quantities of materials as

required to facilitate construction of the Project in a complete and quality manner consistent with the applicable

standards of care. Confirmation of existing conditions is the sole responsibility of the Transferee.

6. The Transferee agrees to the extent permitted by applicable law, to indemnify, hold harmless, release, and defend

the Architect and/or its consultants, their officers, shareholders, employees, and sub-consultants from any and all

injuries, claims, demands, expenses, suits, liabilities, losses, damages, costs, disputes, other matters in question, third

party claims, pass-through claims, subrogated claims, and/or claim expenses related to the Digital Data, including but

not limited to, attorneys’ fees, expert witness fees, and court costs arising out of or in any way related to or

connected with any negligent act and/or omission in the generation, provision, and/or use of the Digital Data by the

Transferee and/or any of its subcontractors, suppliers, and/or consultants and waive any and all rights to such claims

and causes of action.

7. The Transferee waives damages against the Architect for any and all injuries, claims, losses, expenses, damages,

disputes, other matters in question, and/or claim expenses arising out of or relating to this Agreement and/or

generation, provision, and/or use of the Digital Data, including, but not limited to, consequential damages and

reasonable attorneys’ fees and defense costs.

8. The Architect’s and/or the Architect’s consultants’ liability to the Transferee and/or any of its subcontractors,

suppliers, and/or consultants for any and all injuries, claims, losses, expenses, damages, disputes, other matters in

question, third party claims, pass-through claims, subrogated claims, and/or claim expenses arising out of or relating

to this Agreement and/or the Digital Data, including, but not limited to, reasonable attorneys’ fees and defense costs,

regardless of the nature of the claim or damage, shall not exceed, either individually or in the aggregate, the total

amount of $1,000.00. Such causes include, but are not limited to, the Architect’s and/or the Architect’s consultants’

negligence, errors, omissions, strict liability, breach of contract, and/or breach of warranty.

9. To the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, there are no licensing or copyright fees due to

others based on the transmission of the Digital Data, but to the extent that such unknown fees do exist, the

Transferee agrees to pay the required fees and hold the Architect and/or its consultants harmless from any associated

costs or penalties.

10. Upon execution of this Agreement, the Architect grants to the Transferee a non-exclusive, non-transferable

(except as set forth herein) license to use the Digital Data solely and exclusively for informational purposes only,

provided that the Transferee substantially performs its obligations under this Agreement.

11. Any purchase order number provided by the Transferee is for the Transferee’s accounting purposes only. The

Transferee acknowledges and agrees that purchase order terms and conditions are null, void, and inapplicable to this

Agreement.


12. This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties relative to the Digital Data and shall be

governed by the laws of the State of South Carolina.

AUTHORIZED ACCEPTANCE

by Architect: by Original Transferee:

LS3P ASSOCIATES LTD. __________________

________________________________ _____________________________________

Signature Signature

________________________________ _____________________________________

Print Name and Title Print Name and Title

________________________________ _____________________________________

Date Date

by Third Party Transferee:

___________________

________________________________

Signature

________________________________

Print Name and Title

________________________________

Date

WE SO CONSENT:

by Owner:

___________________

________________________________

Signature

________________________________

Print Name and Title

________________________________

Date

LS3P Westside Shoppes – Buildings A-D LS3P 9103-146340 TLC Engineering for Arch. Orlando, Orange County, Florida PERMIT SET - 08 OCTOBER 2015

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings. 2. Slabs-on-grade. 3. Building frame members.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 03 Section "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially finished formed concrete.

2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 3. Division 32 Section "Decorative Concrete Paving" for decorative concrete pavement and

walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.



1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

E. Samples: For waterstops vapor retarder.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer manufacturer testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Semirigid joint filler. 13. Joint-filler strips. 14. Repair materials.

D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates.

E. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Minutes of preinstallation conference.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.



C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

H. Mockups: Cast concrete formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship.

1. Build panel approximately 100 sq. ft. for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. e. Retain first subparagraph below if special concrete finishes are included in Project. f. Special concrete finish subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,



semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface.



3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed bars, assembled with clips.

D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.



D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

C. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. ChemMasters. b. Dayton Superior Corporation. c. Lambert Corporation.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; MiraSTOP. b. CETCO; Volclay Waterstop-RX. c. Greenstreak; Swellstop.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.




a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400. b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type-105. c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 10 mil Class A.

B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

C. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.


a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200. b. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:



1. Types I and II, non-load bearing Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent

portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not

exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, and Silica

Fume: 50 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.

E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.



2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. All Concrete Elements: As indicated on drawings.

2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.13 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd..

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.



1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.



2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES

A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

B. Granular Course: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill fine-graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch or minus 3/4 inch.

1. Place and compact a 1/2-inch- thick layer of fine-graded granular material over granular fill.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.



D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

6. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.



3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.8 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.



4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.



2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface:



a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.



E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3.14 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS



A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.



Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.



3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.



14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing.



GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC) 034900N - 1

SECTION 034900 - GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following glass-fiber-reinforced concrete (GFRC) units consisting of GFRC, anchors, and connection hardware. 1. Column covers.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric joint sealants and sealant backings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of GFRC color, finish, and texture that has been preapproved by Architect before execution of the Contract.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include GFRC design mixes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for GFRC panels including the following: 1. Panel elevations, sections, and dimensions. 2. Thickness of facing mix, GFRC backing, and bonding pads for typical panels. 3. Finishes. 4. Joint and connection details. 5. Erection details. 6. Locations and details of connection hardware attached to structure. 7. Sizes, locations, and details of flex, gravity, and seismic anchors for typical panels. 8. Erection sequence for special conditions. 9. Relationship to adjacent materials. 10. Description of loose, cast-in, and field hardware.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish indicated on exposed GFRC surfaces, representative of finish, color, and texture variations expected, approximately 12 by 12 inches by actual thickness.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For GFRC panels, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.




A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.


C. Source Quality-Control Program: For GFRC manufacturer.

D. Source Quality-Control Test Reports: For GFRC, inserts, and anchors.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Designated a PCI-certified plant for Group G - Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete or designated an APA-certified plant for GFRC production.

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of GFRC panels.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," and AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

D. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.

a. Include typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of installation.

b. Include sealant-filled joint complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Handle and transport GFRC panels supported on nonstaining material and with nonstaining resilient spacers between panels.

B. Store GFRC panels off of ground on firm, level, and smooth surfaces supported on nonstaining material and with nonstaining resilient spacers between panels. Place stored panels so identification marks are clearly visible.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain GFRC panels from single source from single manufacturer. Available manufacturers include the following: 1. Lucas Concrete Products, Inc. 2. Casting Design, Inc. 3. Custom Castings Northeast 4. First Class Building Products 5. Stromberg Architectural Products



2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design GFRC panels, including panel frames, anchors, and connections.

B. Structural Performance: GFRC panels, including panel frames, anchors, and connections, shall withstand the following design loads as well as the effects of thermal- and moisture-induced dimensional changes within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Loads: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design panel frames to withstand design loads without lateral

deflections greater than 1/240 of wall span. 3. Thermal Movements: Provide for thermal movements resulting from annual ambient

temperature changes of 80 deg F.

C. PCI Manuals: Comply with requirements and recommendations in the following PCI manuals unless more stringent requirements are indicated: 1. PCI MNL 128, "Recommended Practice for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Panels." 2. PCI MNL 130, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Glass Fiber

Reinforced Concrete Products."

D. AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

E. AISC Specifications: Comply with AISC 360, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings."

2.3 MOLD MATERIALS

A. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that provides continuous GFRC surfaces within tolerances; nonreactive with GFRC and capable of producing required finish surfaces. 1. Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that does not bond

with, stain, or adversely affect GFRC surfaces and does not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of GFRC.

B. Surface Retarder: Chemical liquid-set retarder capable of temporarily delaying hardening of newly placed GFRC face mix to depth of reveal specified.

2.4 GFRC MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M; Type I, II, or III. 1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use white of same type, brand, and

source throughout GFRC production.

B. Metakaolin: ASTM C 618, Class N.

C. Glass Fibers: Alkali resistant, with a minimum zirconia content of 16 percent, 1 to 2 inches long, specifically produced for use in GFRC, and complying with ASTM C 1666/C 1666M.

D. Sand: Washed and dried silica, complying with composition requirements in ASTM C 144; passing a No. 20 sieve with a maximum of 2 percent passing a No. 100 sieve.



E. Facing Aggregate, for feature wall: ASTM C 33/C 33M, except for gradation, and PCI MNL 130, 1/4-inch maximum size. 1. Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with cement or

causes staining; to match architect’s sample. Provide selected sea glass, mother-of-pearl, and natural seashells, indigenous to South Carolina coast, broken and whole, such as whelk, conch, cockle shells, coquina, and oyster shell.

2. Fine Aggregate: Sand with a maximum of 5 percent passing a No. 100 sieve and a maximum of 3 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of GFRC and complying with chemical limits in PCI MNL 130.

G. Polymer-Curing Admixture: Acrylic thermoplastic copolymer dispersion complying with PCI MNL 130.

H. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M, containing not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.

I. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, containing not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.

2.5 ANCHORS, CONNECTORS, AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, finished as follows: 1. Finish: Zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M, after

fabrication, or ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable.

B. Bolts: ASTM A 307 or ASTM A 325, finished as follows: 1. Finish: Zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M, after

fabrication, and ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable.

2.6 GFRC MIXES

A. Mist Coat: Portland cement, sand slurry, and admixtures; of same proportions as backing mix without glass fibers.

B. Face Mix: Proportion face mix of portland cement, sand, facing aggregates, and admixtures to comply with design requirements.

C. Backing Mix: Proportion backing mix of portland cement, glass fibers, sand, and admixtures to comply with design requirements. Provide nominal glass-fiber content of not less than 5 percent by weight of total mix.

D. Polymer-Curing Admixture: 6 to 7 percent by weight of polymer-curing admixture solids to dry portland cement.

E. Air Content: 8 to 10 percent; ASTM C 185.

F. Coloring Admixture: Not to exceed 10 percent of cement weight.



2.7 MOLD FABRICATION

A. Construct molds that result in finished GFRC complying with profiles, dimensions, and tolerances indicated, without damaging GFRC during stripping. Construct molds to prevent water leakage and loss of cement paste. 1. Coat contact surfaces of molds with form-release agent. 2. Coat contact surfaces of molds with surface retarder.

B. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during GFRC application. Coat form liner with form-release agent.

C. Locate, place, and secure flashing reglets accurately.

2.8 GFRC FABRICATION

A. Proportioning and Mixing: For backing mix, meter sand/cement slurry and glass fibers to spray head at rates to achieve design mix proportions and glass-fiber content according to PCI MNL 130 procedures.

B. Spray Application: Comply with general procedures as follows: 1. Spray mist coat over molds to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch on planar surfaces. 2. Spray or place face mix in thickness indicated on Shop Drawings. 3. Proceed with spraying backing mix before face mix has set, using procedures that

produce a uniform thickness and even distribution of glass fibers and matrix. 4. Consolidate backing mix by rolling or other technique to achieve complete encapsulation

of glass fibers and compaction. 5. Measure thickness with a pin gage or other acceptable method at least once for every 5

sq. ft. of panel surface. Take no fewer than six measurements per panel.

C. Hand form and consolidate intricate details, incorporate formers or infill materials, and overspray before material reaches initial set to ensure complete bonding.

D. Build up homogeneous GFRC bonding pads over anchor feet, maintaining a minimum thickness of 1/2 inch over tops of anchor feet, before initial set of GFRC backing. Measure bonding pad thickness at 25 percent of anchor locations.

E. Inserts and Embedments: Build up homogeneous GFRC bosses or bonding pads over inserts and embedments to provide enough anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements.

F. Curing: Employ initial curing method that ensures sufficient strength for removing units from mold. Comply with PCI MNL 130 procedures. 1. Keep moisture off of the surfaces of mixes with polymer curing admixtures during the

first three hours of curing. Maintain temperature between 60 and 120 deg F during the first 16 hours.

2. Prevent drying of moist curing mixes during the first 24 hours. Maintain units in surface-damp condition at a temperature above 60 deg F and 95 percent relative humidity for seven days.

G. Panel Identification: Mark each GFRC panel to correspond with identification mark on Shop Drawings. Mark each panel with its casting date.



2.9 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Manufacturing Tolerances: Manufacture GFRC panels so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 130 for dimension, position, and tolerances.

B. Manufacturing Tolerances: Manufacture GFRC panels so each finished unit complies with the following dimensional tolerances. For dimensional tolerances not listed below, comply with PCI MNL 130. 1. Overall Height and Width of Units, Measured at the Face Adjacent to Mold: As follows:

a. 10 feet or less, plus or minus 1/8 inch. b. More than 10 feet, plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 feet; 1/4 inch maximum.

2. Edge Return Thickness: Plus 1/2 inch, minus zero inch. 3. Architectural Facing Thickness: Plus 1/8 inch, minus zero inch. 4. Backing Thickness: Plus 1/4 inch, minus zero inch. 5. Panel Depth from Face of Skin to Back of Panel Frame or Integral Rib: Plus 3/8 inch,

minus 1/4 inch. 6. Angular Variation of Plane of Side Mold: Plus or minus 1/32 inch per 3 inches of depth,

or plus or minus 1/16 inch total, whichever is greater. 7. Variation from Square or Designated Skew (Difference in Length of Two Diagonal

Measurements): Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 72 inches or plus or minus 1/4 inch total, whichever is greater.

8. Local Smoothness: 1/4 inch per 10 feet. 9. Bowing: Not to exceed L/240 unless unit complies with erection tolerances using

connection adjustments. 10. Length and Width of Block Outs and Openings within One Unit: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 11. Location of Window Opening within Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 12. Maximum Permissible Warpage of One Corner out of the Plane of the Other Three: 1/16

inch per 12 inches of distance from nearest adjacent corner.

C. Position Tolerances: Measured from datum line locations, as indicated on Shop Drawings. 1. Panel Frame and Track: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 2. Flashing Reglets at Edge of Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 3. Inserts: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 4. Special Handling Devices: Plus or minus 3 inches. 5. Location of Bearing Devices: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 6. Blockouts: Plus or minus 3/8 inch.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Exposed faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including false joints, shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of GFRC to match approved design reference sample and as follows: 1. Columns: Sand- or Abrasive-Blast Finish; Use abrasive grit, equipment, application

techniques, and cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces.

2. Interior Feature Wall: Retarded Finish; Use chemical-retarding agents applied to concrete forms and washing and brushing procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces after form removal.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL



A. Quality-Control Testing: Establish and maintain a quality-control program for manufacturing GFRC panels according to PCI MNL 130. 1. Test materials and inspect production techniques. 2. Quality-control program shall monitor glass-fiber content, spray rate, unit weight,

product physical properties, anchor pull-off and shear strength, and curing period and conditions.

3. Prepare test specimens and test according to ASTM C 1228, PCI MNL 130, and PCI MNL 128 procedures.

4. Test GFRC inserts and anchors according to ASTM C 1230 to validate design values. 5. Produce test boards at a rate of no fewer than one per work shift per operator for each

spray machine and for each mix design.

a. For each test board, determine glass-fiber content according to ASTM C 1229 and flexural yield and ultimate strength according to ASTM C 947.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine structure and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting GFRC panels to supporting members and backup materials.

B. Install GFRC panels level, plumb, square, and in alignment. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of panels until permanent connections are completed. 1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width. 2. Remove projecting hoisting devices.

C. Connect GFRC panels in position by bolting, as indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after connecting is completed.

D. At bolted connections, use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of nuts.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erect GFRC panels to comply with the following noncumulative tolerances: 1. Plan Location from Building Grid Datum: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: As follows:

a. Exposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. b. Nonexposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. c. Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/4 inch. d. Nonexposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/2 inch.

3. Support Elevation from Nominal Elevation: As follows:



a. Maximum Low: 1/2 inch. b. Maximum High: 1/4 inch.

4. Maximum Plumb Variation over the Lesser of Height of Structure or 100 Feet: 1 inch. 5. Plumb in Any 10 Feet of Element Height: 1/4 inch. 6. Maximum Offset in Alignment of Matching Edges: 1/4 inch. 7. Face Width of Joint: As follows (governs over joint taper):

a. Panel Dimension 20 Feet or Less: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. b. Panel Dimension More Than 20 Feet: Plus or minus 3/8 inch.

8. Maximum Joint Taper: 3/8 inch. 9. Maximum Joint Taper in 10 Feet: 1/4 inch. 10. Differential Bowing, as Erected, between Adjacent Members of Same Design: 1/4 inch.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Repairs are permitted provided structural adequacy of GFRC panel and appearance are not impaired, as approved by Architect.

B. Mix patching materials and repair GFRC so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces.

C. Prepare and repair accessible damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M.

D. Wire brush and clean accessible weld areas on prime-painted components and paint with same type of shop primer.

E. Remove and replace damaged GFRC panels when repairs do not comply with requirements.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to GFRC manufacturer's written instructions. Clean soiled GFRC surfaces with detergent and water, using soft fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Prevent damage to GFRC surfaces and staining of adjacent materials.



CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200R - 1

SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's). 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Steel reinforcing bars. 4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 5. Anchors.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 072413 “Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS)” for coordination of joint locations.



B. Shop Drawings: For joint locations. For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.

1. Coordinate joint locations with joints in adjacent EIFS system Work specified in other sections.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Decorative CMUs. 2. Mortar color. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on

Project.


A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.



1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

C. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

D. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather and hot-weather requirements.


A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Limitations on Aggregates: Provide units free of impurities that will cause rusting, staining or popouts and with a record of successful in-service performance in conditions similar to those expected at Project site.

1. Ferrous material shall be removed by magnetic separation. 2. Aggregates shall contain no combustible materials or coal cinders. 3. Aggregates shall be graded and supplied in consist graduations from batch to batch. 4. Material shall be tested according to the following:

a. ASTM C40: Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete. b. ASTM C 136: Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate. c. ASTM C 641: Staining Materials in Lightweight Concrete Aggregates. d. ASTM C 151: Autoclave Expansion of Hydraulic Cement (for popouts.)

C. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

2. Mortar Test: For mortar properties per ASTM C 270. 3. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019.

D. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for mockups.

1. Build sample panels for typical exterior and interior walls in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."



1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work and prior to inclement weather. Cover and maintain coverage of partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of joints with joints in other adjacent areas of Work specified in “Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi.

2. Weight Classification: Lightweight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.

B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for corners, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions, including solid coping cap blocks.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.



2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. Provide bull-nose block for exposed corners on interior walls.

C. Integral Water Repellent: Provide exterior, exposed concrete masonry units made with integral water repellent.

1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) ACM Chemistries, 2) Master Builders, Inc./BASF, 3) W. R. Grace & Co.

D. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Basis of Design: Oldcastle, “Split Face Rockface Masonry Units”. 2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 2800 psi. 3. Density Classification: Lightweight. 4. Size (Height): 3-5/8”. 5. Pattern and Texture:

a. Standard pattern, split-face finish. Match Architect's samples. 6. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide Type S unless another type is needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.



1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C143/ C143M.

E. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

F. Masonry Cement: Not permitted.

G. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.

H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.

I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

J. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80 c. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset d. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA

K. Water-Repellent Admixture for Exterior, Exposed Mortar: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with brick and stone masonry units.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. ACM Chemistries b. Master Builders, Inc./BASF, c. W.R. Grace & Co.

L. Water: Potable.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M, hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.

1. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inchdiameter. 2. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter.



3. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.

2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into masonry but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face.

B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

3. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 316. 4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

2. Tie Section for Steel Frame: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.188-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

D. Partition Top Anchors: 0.097-inch thick metal plate with 3/8-inch diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Pre-Compressed Joint Filler for CMU: Water-based, 100% acrylic, impregnated expanding foam sealant with internal laminations of closed cell foam.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).



2.7 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.


a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc.; NMD80 (Basis of Design) c. ProSoCo, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.



4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

C. Bond Pattern: Unless otherwise indicated, lay masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to



provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

3. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on

footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and

extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch wide between masonry and structural member unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.



3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally.

3.7 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.


A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections.

1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes.

2. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.



3.10 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Masonry Waste: Remove masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property. 1. Comply with Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal" for

recycling and disposal requirements.



CALCIUM SILICATE MASONRY VENEER 042310 - 1

SECTION 042310 - CALCIUM SILICATE MASONRY VENEER

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Calcium silicate masonry veneer anchored to cold-formed metal framing and sheathing.


A. Samples for Verification: Sets for each color, grade, finish, and variety of calcium silicate required. Include 2 or more Samples in each set showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed calcium silicate masonry veneer similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations for Calcium Silicate: Obtain each variety of calcium silicate from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the work. 1. Obtain each variety of calcium silicate from a single quarry, whether specified in this

Section or in another Section of the Specifications.

C. Mockups: Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry assembly to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in undamaged condition.

B. Store and handle calcium silicate and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, or other causes.

C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.




A. Protection of Calcium silicate Masonry Veneer: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at the end of each day's work. Cover partially completed calcium silicate masonry veneer when construction is not in progress.

B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil to prevent them from staining the face of calcium silicate masonry veneer. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on the

ground and over the wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and doorframes, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt on completed calcium silicate masonry veneer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CALCIUM SILICATE MASONRY UNITS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following calcium silicate masonry units indicated or an Architect approved equal: 1. Arriscraft International, Inc.; Renaissance Masonry Units, trim, water table sills, and bases.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

b. Number of colors: Three at Building E; Five project overall.

c. Sill Profiles and colors: Coordinate and provide sill profiles and colors as indicat-ing on Drawings.

2.2 MORTAR MIXES

A. Mortar for Calcium Silicate Units: Proportion specification, 1 part Portland cement, 1 part hydrated lime, 6 parts mortar aggregate by volume for both cementitious materials and aggregate, thoroughly mixed in proper quantities needed for immediate use to requirements of ASTM C270.

2.3 ADJUSTABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS

A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies allowing vertical or horizontal differential movement between veneer and wall framing parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it, for attachment over sheathing to metal studs, and with the following structural performance characteristics: 1. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in either

tension or compression without developing play or deforming more than 0.05 inch.

B. Materials: Provide masonry-veneer anchors of the following materials and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating.



a. Wire Diameter: 0.25 inch.

C. Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange by not less than 3 exposed threads, and with the following corrosion-protective coating: 1. Organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 500 hours per

ASTM B 117.

D. Seismic Anchors: Comply with Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from the following material: 1. Neoprene. 2. Urethane. 3. PVC.

B. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Products:

a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break. b. Dur-O-Wal, A Hohmann and Bernard Company; Polytite MortarStop. c. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net.

2. Configuration: Provide one of the following: a. Strips, full depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail-shaped notches 7 inches

deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings. b. Strips, not less than 3/4 inch thick and 10 inches high, with dimpled surface designed

to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar.

2.5 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry-measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup dry-measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water.

2.6 CALCIUM SILICATE MASONRY UNIT FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate calcium silicate masonry units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings.

B. Cut calcium silicate to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable calcium silicate association or, if none, by calcium silicate source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs. Clean sawn backs of calcium silicate to remove rust stains and iron particles.

C. Thickness of Calcium Silicate Masonry Veneer: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following: 1. Thickness: 4 inchesplus or minus 1/2 inch.



D. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Shape calcium silicate for type of masonry (pattern) indicated: 1. Type of Masonry (Pattern): Running bond. 2. Unit Sizes: 8 by 24 inch; 4 by 24; and 12 by 24, with and without false joint split to creeate

12 by 12 units.

F. Finish exposed faces and edges of calcium silicate to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups. 1. Finish: Satin, “Rocked”.

G. Carefully inspect calcium silicate units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive calcium silicate masonry veneer, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of calcium silicate masonry veneer. 1. Examine substrate to verify that inserts, reinforcement, veneer ties, flashing, and other items

installed in unit masonry or concrete and required for or extending into calcium silicate masonry veneer are correctly installed.

2. Examine wall framing, sheathing, and asphalt-saturated felt covering to verify that stud locations are suitable for spacing of veneer anchors and that installation will result in a weatherproof covering.

3. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of reinforcement, anchors, ties, flashing, and similar items to be built into calcium silicate masonry veneer.

B. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of asphalt-saturated felt before beginning calcium silicate installation.

C. Protect calcium silicate masonry veneer during erection as follows: 1. Cover tops of walls with nonstaining, waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover

partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold securely in place.

2. Prevent staining of calcium silicate from mortar, grout, sealants, and other sources. Immediately remove such materials without damaging calcium silicate.

3. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface.

4. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

D. Clean calcium silicate surfaces that have become dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean calcium silicate by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber



brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.

3.3 SETTING CALCIUM SILICATE MASONRY VENEER, GENERAL

A. Execute calcium silicate masonry veneer by skilled masons experienced with the kind and form of calcium silicate and installation method indicated. 1. Employ skilled fitters at the Project site to do necessary field cutting as units are set. Use

power saws to cut units. Produce lines cut straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.

2. Arrange and trim units for accurate fit with uniform joint widths, and to provide offset between vertical joints as indicated.

3. Arrange units for good fit with joint widths within tolerances indicated, and to provide offset between vertical joints as indicated.

4. Arrange units for proper blend, matching existing masonry blend, with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended appearance.

B. Set calcium silicate masonry units to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure calcium silicate masonry veneer in place. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

C. Maintain uniform joint widths, except for variations due unit size variations and minor variations required to maintain bond alignment, if any. Lay walls with joints of the following width. 1. Joint Width: 3/8-inch.

D. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. Sealing expansion and other joints is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 2. Keep expansion joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.

E. Install concealed flashing at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, and similar obstructions to downward flow of water to divert water to exterior. 1. At wood and metal frame walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through the

veneer, up face of sheathing at least 8 inches, and behind asphalt-saturated felt. 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each

end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form a pan.

F. Do not install calcium silicate masonry units below grade.

G. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.

H. Place weep holes and vents in joints where moisture may accumulate including base of cavity walls, above shelf angles, and flashing. Locate weep holes and vents at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. 1. Form weep holes by keeping head joints free and clear of mortar.



3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inchin20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.

B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.

D. Measure variation from plumb, level, and position shown in plan as the variation of the average plane of the face of each calcium silicate masonry unit from a plumb, level, or dimensioned plane.

E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated.

F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent units: Do not exceed one-half of tolerance specified for thickness of units.

G. Variation in Plane on Face of Individual units: Do not exceed one-half of tolerance specified for thickness of units.

3.5 INSTALLING ANCHORED MASONRY VENEER

A. Anchor masonry veneer to framing with adjustable masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to framing with 2 fasteners of type indicated. 2. Embed tie section in mortar joints to within 1-1/2 inches of face. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 32inches o.c.

horizontally. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals around perimeter not exceeding 12 inches.

B. Set calcium silicate masonry units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as unit is set. 1. Install continuous wire reinforcement in horizontal joints indicated and attached to seismic

veneer anchors as unit is set.

C. Fill collar joint solid as unit is set.

D. Provide 2-inch air space between calcium silicate masonry veneer and back-up construction, unless otherwise indicated. Keep air space free of mortar droppings and debris. 1. Slope beds toward air space to minimize mortar protrusions into air space. As work

progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into air space flat against back of veneer.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace calcium silicate masonry veneer of the following description:



1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged units. Units may be repaired if the methods and results are approved by Architect.

2. Defective joints. 3. Calcium silicate masonry veneer and joints not matching approved samples and mockups. 4. Calcium silicate masonry veneer not complying with other requirements indicated.

B. Replace in a manner that results in calcium silicate masonry veneer's matching approved samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean calcium silicate masonry veneer as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean calcium silicate masonry veneer in manner to produce aesthetic to match existing masonry veneer materials.

E. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure calcium silicate masonry veneer is without damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

3.7 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE

A. Masonry Waste: Remove clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel. 2. Grout.


1. Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel.

2. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to

structural-steel frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not defined as structural steel.

4. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface-preparation and priming requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.




A. Product Data: For each type of product.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following:

1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator testing agency.


C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

E. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Shop primers. 3. Nonshrink grout.

F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Field quality-control reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.



C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1 or to SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use Load and Resistance Factor Design; data are given at factored-load level.

B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.



C. Construction: Shear wall system.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Corrosion-Resisting Structural-Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 588/A 588M, Grade 50.

E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.

F. Corrosion-Resisting, Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 847/A 847M, structural tubing.

G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain.

D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain.

2.4 PRIMER

A. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



B. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

2.5 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill,or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.



2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.8 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." 5. SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning." 6. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 7. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning." 8. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning." 9. SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.

Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.



D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.

2.9 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2. Galvanize lintels shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.



1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.



G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.



E. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

D. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."



STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 1

SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. K-series steel joists. 2. KCS-type K-series steel joists. 3. K-series steel joist substitutes. 4. Joist accessories.


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete. 2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry. 3. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for field-welded shear connectors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."

B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications."


A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists. 2. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and

connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 3. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.




C. Manufacturer certificates.

D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt.

E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications."

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."

B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into cast-in-place concrete and masonry construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated.

1. Use LRFD; data are given at factored-load level.

2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load deflections no greater than the following:

a. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span.

2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS

A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.

1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists.



B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.

C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.

D. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."

E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."

F. Do not camber joists.

G. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications.".

H. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.

2.3 PRIMERS

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.

B. Primer: Provide shop primer that complies with Division 09 painting Sections.

2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES

A. Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications." Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.

B. Fabricate steel bearing plates from ASTM A 36/A 36M steel with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated. Shop prime paint.

C. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications."

D. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated.

E. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain, uncoated.

F. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.



G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

H. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

I. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly.

2.5 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.

B. Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

C. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.

D. Shop priming of joists and joist accessories is specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.

B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section.

1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that

joists are stabilized during construction. 4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead

loads are applied.

C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts.



E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with Research Council on Structural Connection's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.

F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports.

B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following procedures, as applicable:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709. c. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94.

C. Visually inspect bolted connections.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements.

E. Perform additional testing to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting structural steel, and accessories.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning according to SSPC-SP 3.

2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent surfaces.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.



D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



STEEL DECKING 053100 - 1

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck.


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight and lightweight structural concrete fill over steel deck.

2. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors.

3. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes.

4. Division 09 painting Sections for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:

1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners. 2. Acoustical roof deck.

D. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.



E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

C. Electrical Raceway Units: Provide UL-labeled cellular floor-deck units complying with UL 209 and listed in UL's "Electrical Construction Equipment Directory" for use with standard header ducts and outlets for electrical distribution systems.


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc. 2. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 3. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group.

B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following:



1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G90 zinc coating.

2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 5. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 6. Side Laps: Overlapped.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth.

G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

H. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck.

I. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch minimum diameter.

J. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.

K. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck, with 3-inch- wide flanges and sloped recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field.

L. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

M. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of abutting panels.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: As indicated. 2. Weld Spacing: As indicated. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: As indicated.



C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum.

D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches apart with at least one fastener at each corner.

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and mechanically fasten.

E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.

F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.

1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view.

2. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of bottom deck surfaces are included in Division 09 Section."



C. Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of both deck surfaces are included in Division 09 Section."

D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. 2. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-load-bearing,

metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies. 3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for interior non-load-

bearing, metal-stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies.


A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated.

2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following:

a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height.

b. Exterior Non-Load Bearing Framing With Adhered Masonry Veneer: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load of 1/600 of span.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

a. Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch.



B. Cold-Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

1. Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."

2. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.

3. Roof Trusses: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design."


A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.


C. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products:

1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed metal framing.


A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing



engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.

D. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

G. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design." 2. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."

H. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings."

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the following:



1. AllSteel Products, Inc. 2. Clark Steel Framing. 3. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90 or equivalent.

B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90.

2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-3/8 inches.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. b. MarinoWare, a division of Ware Industries. c. SCAFCO Corporation d. The Steel Network, Inc.

D. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure.



2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates.

2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.



B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.


A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.



a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As required for structural performance but not greater than 16” o.c..

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.



E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

a. Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Shop Drawings.

2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment and applications

where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 2. Shelf angles. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 4. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections. 5. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel edgings. 6. Metal ladders. 7. Security ladder guard. 8. Metal bollards. 9. Metal downspout boots. 10. Metal dumpster enclosure gates. 11. Metal shutters.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete

or built into unit masonry.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves,

wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete. 2. Section 042200 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for installing anchor bolts and other items

indicated to be built into concrete unit masonry.


A. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.



C. Delegated Design: Design metal fabrications, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1. Professional engineer shall be legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is

located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.

D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.


A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections. 3. Shelf angles. 4. Metal ladders. 5. Security ladder guard. 6. Metal bollards. 7. Metal downspout boots. 8. Metal dumpster-enclosure gate. 9. Metal shutters. 10. Loose steel lintels.

C. Delegated Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified registered professional engineer in the state of North Carolina responsible for their preparation.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."




A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying

the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.

D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.



F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.

G. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

H. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

2.3 METAL DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE GATES

A. Metal Swing Gates, General: Subject to compliance with requirements provide “1″ x 4″ Tongue & Groove System with 2″ by 3″ Frame” by Easternmetal or an Architect approved equal. 1. Gate Configuration: Double leaf with casters. 2. Gate Frame Height: As indicated. 3. Gate Opening Width: As indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square tubes formed from 0.108-inch nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or formed from 0.105-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

C. Frame Corner Construction: Welded.

D. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, casters, and keepers for each gate leaf more than 5 feet wide. Provide center gate stops and cane bolts for pairs of gates. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides of gate.

E. Spring Hinges: BHMA A156.17, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use. 1. Function: 320 - Gate spring pivot hinge. Adjustable tension. 2. Material: Cast steel; galvanized.

F. Cane Bolts: Provide for inactive leaf of pairs of gates. Fabricated from 3/4-inch- diameter, round steel bars, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Finish to match gates. Provide galvanized-steel pipe strikes to receive cane bolts in closed position.

G. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #2 - completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay.

H. Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

I. Steel Finish: High-performance coating, color as selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.

2.4 METAL SHUTTERS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal shutters designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent shutters and mechanically attaching shutters to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.



B. Metal Shutters, General: Subject to compliance with requirements provide “Hurricane 50 Shutters” by Easternmetal or an Architect approved equal. 1. Style: Bahama. 2. Material: Aluminum 3. Blade Width: 2-inch. 4. Profile: As selected by Architect.

C. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required. 1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.

D. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for installing units where set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery of inserts and anchoring devices with other work to avoid delaying installation.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. 1. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring iron fabrications to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Shutter Fasteners: Use tamperproof fasteners where exposed to view.

D. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

E. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1.

F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being

fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

G. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.

H. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

I. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.

J. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.



K. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M

malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.

L. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to

comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 2 stainless-steel bolts

complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.


A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat.

D. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Division 09 painting sections.

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated provide formulation

that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.



2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Connections: Provide welded connections unless otherwise indicated.

F. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

G. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is

manufacturer's standard splicing method.

H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

I. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

J. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

K. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with

integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.



2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed. 3. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into

masonry. 4. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. and provide minimum anchor

units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide x 1/4 inch x 8 inches long.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.

2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

C. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls using G-90 coating.

2.10 SHELF ANGLES

A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint

approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.

B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.

C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.



2.11 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

B. Galvanize plates after fabrication.

2.12 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry

construction.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

D. Prime interior miscellaneous steel trim, where indicated with zinc-rich primer.

2.14 METAL LADDERS

A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1. 3. Space siderails 18 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or

bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.

B. Steel Ladders: 1. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8- by 2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 2. Rungs: 3/4-inch diameter steel bars. 3. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 4. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-

oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout.

5. Galvanize ladders, including brackets and fasteners.



2.15 SECURITY LADDER GUARD

A. Available Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirement provide basis of design product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bluewater Manufacturing 2. Cotterman 3. FS Industries

B. General: 1. Basis of Design: “Security Ladder Guard, Option LG” by Cotterman. 2. Height: 6ft. 3. Hinge: Piano, single piece. 4. Mount: Direct mount. 5. Material: Galvanized steel. 6. Accessories: Lock-open, and lock-closed hasps.

2.16 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. Cap bollards with 1/4 inch minimum thickness steel base plate.

B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard.

C. Precast Bollard Domes: Provide 5000 psi, fiber-reinforced precast concrete pipe bollard caps with Class A formed finish and symmetrically domed profile. 1. Basis of Design: TopGard; Pipe Bollard Cap

2.17 METAL DOWNSPOUT BOOTS

A. Provide downspout boots made from cast iron, in heights indicated with inlets of size and shape to suit downspouts. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. McKinley Iron Works c. Neenah Foundry

2. Outlet: As required to discharge into pipe. 3. Finish: Powder coat. Color to match downspout.

2.18 METAL SHUTTERS

A. Fabricate and finish metal shutters and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.



B. Provide shutter profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of shutter.

2.19 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.20 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-

SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of components that have been coated or finished

after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.



Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Adjust fabrications before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

F. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

G. Connections: 1. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting

fabrication components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to members and fittings.

2. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting fabrication components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for overhead doors securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, nonmetallic, in all locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.



3.4 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors or anchor bolts. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Embed anchor bolts at least 4 inches in concrete.

B. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard.

C. Fill bollards solidly with concrete and install precast bollard cap in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Refer to Division 09 for paint requirements.

3.5 INSTALLING SECURITY LADDER GUARDS

A. Install ladder guards in accordance with manufacturers written recommendations.

3.6 INSTALLING METAL SWING GATES

A. Install gates level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.


A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing agency will randomly select completed metal fabrication assemblies for testing that are representative of different designs and conditions in the completed Work. Railings will be tested according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 for compliance with performance requirements.

C. Remove and replace fabrications where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Architect and will comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.



B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.



MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.




A. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Expansion anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.

B. Lumber shall be stored off of the ground.

C. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings with breathable tarps.

D. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.



2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

3. Use Categories:

a. AWPA U1-UC1: Interior, dry applications, such as furniture, some millwork. b. AWPA U1-UC2: Interior, potentially damp applications, such as beams, timbers,

flooring, framing, millwork, sill plates. c. AWPA U1-UC3A: Exterior, coated not in contact with ground, such as coated

millwork, siding, trim. d. AWPA U1-UC4A: Exterior, in contact with ground normal, such as fence/deck

posts. e. AWPA U1-UC5B: Exposed to salt water between NJ and Georgia/south of San

Francisco

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood).

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior: Use type for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior: Use Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing and where

indicated. 4. Interior: Use Type A, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.

C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:



1. Concealed blocking. 2. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including blocking, nailers, and cants.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness and fire-retardant treated per AWPA C27.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. Fasteners shall be compatible with all connecting subtrates.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 316 stainless steel.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

D. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.



G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.


A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spun-bonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

E. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.

F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.



G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

H. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

I. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

1. Do not use wood blocking in fire-resistance-rated assemblies.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



SHEATHING 061600 - 1

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.


1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.

B. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.

D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground.



1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Application: Treat plywood at all exterior decks and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete.

2.3 WALL SHEATHING

A. Plywood Sheathing: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 sheathing.

1. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc b. G-P Gypsum Corporation; DensGlass Gold c. Lafarge North America; Weather Defense Platinum d. National Gypsum; eXP Sheathing e. United States Gypsum; Securock

2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches.

2.4 ROOF SHEATHING

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc b. G-P Gypsum Corporation; DensGlass Gold c. Lafarge North America; Weather Defense Platinum d. National Gypsum; eXP Sheathing e. United States Gypsum; Securock

2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick. 3. Size: 48 by 96 inches.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. For wall and roof sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.



2.6 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing, and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners.

B. Sheathing Tape for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing board and with a history of successful in-service use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

D. Use common wire nails on wood sheathing unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

E. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-treatment installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:



a. Nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.

3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural

elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that

might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing.

C. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards.

3.4 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT

A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing board joints, and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.

3.5 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

A. Special Inspections and tests shall be performed by the Special Inspector or Special Inspection Agency.

B. Verification and inspection of rough carpentry construction shall be in accordance with Section 1705.5 of IBC 2012 and as follows:

1. Details: Perform an inspection of the installed roof and wall sheathing to verify compliance with the details shown on the construction documents such as panel grade, thickness, blocking and fastening.

C. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Additional testing performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements shall be at Contractor’s expense.



FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED-POLYESTER (FRP) FABRICATIONS 066100 - 1

SECTION 066100 - FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED-POLYESTER (FRP) FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fiberglass reinforced polyester cornices, cupolas and trim pieces.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and field applied sealants.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, weights, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Detailing fabrication of all GFRP items including the following:

1. Unit shapes (elevations and sections) and dimensions 2. Thickness 3. Finishes 4. Joint and connection details 5. Lifting and erection details 6. Location and details for hardware attached to structure 7. Size, location, and details of anchors 8. Sequence of erection for special conditions 9. Relationship to adjacent materials

10. Description of loose, cast-in, and field-applied hardware

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer, registered in the state of South Carolina, responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and installer.


A. Source Limitation: Obtain architectural fiberglass from a single source manufacturer.



B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm with a demonstrated capability to produce FRP products of quality and scope required for this project and actively involved in FRP production for at least five years. Manufacturer must have sufficient production capacity to produce, transport, and deliver required units without causing delay in the work.

C. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer and that has a minimum of five years experience in the installation of FRP fabrications similar in design and extent to that proposed for this project.

D. Manufacturer to fabricate architectural fiberglass based upon provisions published in the "Guidelines and Recommended Practices for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Architectural Products".

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.


1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Transport, lift, and handle units with care, avoiding excessive stress and preventing damage; use appropriate equipment.

B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation, in a clean dry area off the ground and protected from weather, moisture and damage; store units upright and not stacked unless permitted by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Basis of Design products indicated or an Architect approved equal by one of the following.

1. Architectural Fiberglass, Inc. 2. Architectural Mall, Inc. 3. CBL Architectural Fiberglass 4. Edon Corporation 5. Fibertech 6. Melton Classics 7. Spaulding Craft, Inc. (Basis-Of-Design) 8. Stromberg Group 9. TurnCraft


A. Delegated Design: Design fiberglass fabrications and fastening systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.



1. Professional engineer shall be legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.

B. Seismic Performance: GPRP fabrications shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. Component Importance Factor is indicated on Structural Drawings.

C. Physical Performance:

1. Flexural Strength: 20000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. 2. Modulus of Elasticity: 0.9 x 10^6 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. 3. Tensile Strength: 12000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638. 4. Compressive Strength: 17000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 695. 5. Bearing Strength: 9000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638. 6. Thermal Expansion Coefficient: 10 x 10^-6 per degree F. 7. Specific Gravity: 1.5.

2.3 FABRICATION MOLDS

A. Molds: Molds shall be produced with ample layers of tooling resin, tooling gel-coat, glass fibers and/or flexible rubber.

1. Produced molds shall have rigidity and thickness to prevent distortion and deflection of molded architectural fiberglass.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Molded Exterior Surface: U-V inhibited, polyester gel coat, 18 to 22 mils thick.

B. Barrier Coat: Provide backup polyester surface veil, 18-20 mils thick, to prevent glass print through.

C. Back Up Laminate:

1. Resin: Polyester resin shall be fire retardant, and meet Class 1 flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke density under 450 without the use of antimony trioxide as characterized by the ASTM E-84 tunnel test at typical 1/8-inch glass mat laminate. General purpose resin will not be permitted.

2. Filler: Functional filler to be added to resin matrix to minimize shrinkage, add stiffness, control opacity, add fire retardance, improve surface finish, minimize crazing, and control dimensional stability from weather extremes.

3. Fiberglass Reinforcement: Type "E" fiberglass, glass cloth, matt and/or random chopped glass fibers. Glass content approximately 20- to 30 percent.

4. Laminate Thickness: Nominal laminate shall be minimum 3/16-inch thickness. Additional core reinforcements and/or sandwich structure added as required for rigidity and structural integrity.



2.5 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

A. Fasteners: Provide Type 316 stainless-steel concealed fasteners.

B. Embedments: As standard with manufacturer and as required for reinforcement and for anchorage to substrates and framing.

C. Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the design load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the design load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Where fiberglass-reinforced plastic fabrications are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions affecting work of this section and indicate on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Fabricate FRP units in lengths and sizes that will minimize the number of joints between abutting units. Fabricate units to dimensions and profiles indicated on approved Shop Drawings. Fabrications shall be 1/4 to 3/16-inch thick at shell. Reinforce construction where required for fasteners and to provide rigidity necessary to erect fabricated units.

C. Provide all special transition, corner pieces (inside and outside) and special closures necessary for a complete, visually continuous, weather tight installation. All inside and outside corners shall be shop fabricated. Fabrication of corners in field will not be permitted.

D. Coordinate miscellaneous cutouts required for vents, drainage and other obstructions and penetrations.

E. Dimensional Tolerances: Manufacture units so that each panel complies with following dimensional tolerances.

1. Variation in Thickness from Nominal: Plus and minus 1/8 inch, maximum.

2. Variation in Thickness of Gel Coat: Plus and minus 2.5 mils, maximum.

3. Variation from Dimensions Indicated on Drawings: Plus and minus 1/8 inch, maximum.

4. Variation from Square: Plus and minus 1/8 inch, maximum.

5. Variation of Hardware From Intended Location: Plus and minus 1/4 inch, maximum.

F. Panel Identification: Mark each panel to correspond to identification mark on shop drawings for panel identification.

G. Cure and clean prior to shipment; remove material that may be toxic to plant or animal life or incompatible with adjacent building materials.

2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide factory-finished polyurethane gelcoat to match approved sample.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



2. Surface Texture/Exposed side shall be aggregate stone finish as selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify field conditions and substrates that affect installation of fiberglass reinforced fabrications; bearing surfaces are true and level and support framing has been constructed to permit accurate placement, alignment and connections of fabrications to structure.

B. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies are corrected. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of conditions.

3.2 ERECTION, GENERAL

A. Assemble and install FRP fabrications in strict accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and approved Shop Drawings. Include materials and accessories necessary to complete installation of each item, whether or not such materials and items are specifically specified on shown on the Drawings.

B. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting as necessary to install FRP fabrications. Seal all cut or drilled surfaces per manufacturer's instructions. Provide adequate ventilation during all drilling, cutting, and resin application procedures.

C. Install FRP fabrications level, plumb and aligned with adjacent material.

D. Space joints according to shop drawings, not less than 1/8-inch and not greater than 3/8-inch. Prepare joints by lightly sanding and filling joints with a continuous bead of specified sealant as work progresses to make a weather tight joint. Carefully monitor ambient temperatures at time of installation to prevent excessive expansion and contraction of panels during sealant application. Refer to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Countersink all exposed fasteners and repair with manufacturer's supplied colored gel-coat patching material. Repairs shall be made with care to be undetectable.

F. Do not field cut fabrications where the finish cannot be field restored. Installer may repair small unnoticeable finish repairs with manufacturer's supplied colored gel-coat patching material.

G. Erection Tolerances:

1. Set fabrications plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in three (3) feet.

2. Align units so variations from level do not exceed 1/4 inch in twelve (12) feet.

3. Set fabrications so that maximum variation from true position is 1/2 inch in 20 feet.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous FRP items securely in place. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners, when approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for



masonry; machine and carriage bolts for steel; through bolts and screws. Conceal fastenings where practicable.

3.4 PATCHING

A. General: Patching will be permitted provided structural adequacy of unit and its appearance are not impaired, as acceptable to Architect.

B. Patching Mix: Match color and texture of unit. Blend and mix materials so that cured patching blends with adjacent surfaces and is not evident when viewed from a distance of 6 feet.

3.5 CLEANING

A. General: Perform cleaning procedures as recommended by unit manufacturer.

B. Clean soiled surfaces with detergent and water, using soft fiber brushes and sponges, and thoroughly rinse with clean water. Use care to prevent damage to surfaces and to adjacent materials.



SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING (BELOW GRADE) 071326 - 1

SECTION 071326 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing. 2. Insulation protection board.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for coordination of unexposed concrete finishing for application of sheet waterproofing.


A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.


A. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for waterproofing.

D. Special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project.

1. Installer shall have not less than five waterproofing projects similar to requirements for this Project with satisfactory in-service performance.



B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide auxiliary materials as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Before beginning installation, install waterproofing to 100 sq. ft. of slab area and to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, and execution quality.

1. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reapply waterproofing and reinstall overlying construction until mockups are approved.


D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.


A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's project specific form in which manufacturer agrees to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty includes repairing or replacing waterproofing membrane and removing and reinstalling backfill, protection board, and drainage panels.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING

A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Not less than 60-mil- thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick, polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. American Hydrotech, Inc.; VM 75. b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861. c. CETCO Building Materials Group; Envirosheet. d. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Bituthene 3000. e. Henry Company; Blueskin WP 200. f. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Mel-Rol g. Polyguard; 650 Membrane

2. Physical Properties:

a. Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C 836. e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154. f. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385. g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at

70 deg F; ASTM D 570. h. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms; ASTM E 96, Water Method.

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.

1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low viscosity.

E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating.

F. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheet strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing.



G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

1. Detail Tape: Two-sided, pressure-sensitive, self-adhering reinforced tape, 4-1/2 inches wide, with a tack-free protective adhesive coating on one side and release film on self-adhering side.

2. Detail Strips: 62.5-mil thick, felt-reinforced self-adhesive strip, 9 inches wide, with release film on adhesive side.

H. Metal Termination Bars: Stainless steel bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 6-inch centers.

2.3 INSULATION PROTECTION BOARD

A. Insulation Protection Board: Unfaced, extruded-polystyrene board insulation, nominal thickness 2 inches with compressive strength of not less than 25 psi per ASTM D 1621.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

2. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.


3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.

E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

1. Install sheet strips and center over treated construction and contraction joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch.



F. Bridge and cover isolation joints, expansion joints, and discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-to-deck joints with overlapping sheet strips.

1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate.

G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.

1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets of liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows:

a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from corner or install membrane strip centered over corner.

H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135. Begin waterproofing in presence of manufacturer’s technical representative.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.

1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self-adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F.

D. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low point to high point to ensure that side laps shed water.

E. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.

F. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with stainless steel termination bar and mastic.

G. Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent air barrier.

H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.

I. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.



3.4 PROTECTION BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane immediately. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch of projections and penetrations.

B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive or tape applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.

B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

C. Protect installed protection board from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 3. Mineral-wool blanket insulation. 4. Closed-cell spray polyurethane foam insulation.


1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in cavity walls. 2. Section 071326 "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" for insulation protection panels

installed with waterproofing. 3. Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall fire-stop sealants used

for fire-rated walls. 4. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blankets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. R-Value: Long-term thermal resistance as determined in accordance with CAN/ULC-S770 and ASTM C1289, Annex A1.




A. Qualification Data: For installer of spray polyurethane foam insulation.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.


A. Installer Qualifications for Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.



B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.


a. DiversiFoam Products b. Dow Chemical Company c. Owens Corning d. Pactive Building Products

2. Type IV, 25 psi, 1.6 lb./cu.ft. minimum density, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or as required to meet R-value indicated on

Drawings. 4. Thermal Resistance, per ASTM C518, at 75 deg. F mean temperature shall be R-5 per

inch.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product recommended and approved by manufacturer, with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.



2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.


a. CertainTeed Corporation b. Guardian Building Products, Inc. c. Johns Manville d. Knauf Insulation e. Owens Corning

2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION

A. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc. b. Owens Corning c. Roxul Inc. d. Thermafiber

2.4 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION

A. Closed-Cell Spray Polyurethane Foam: ASTM C 1029, Type II, minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft. and minimum aged R-value at 1-inch thickness of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.


a. BASF Corporation b. CertainTeed Corporation c. Dow Chemical Company d. Gaco Western LLC e. Henry Company f. Icynene Inc. g. Johns Manville h. NCFI Polyurethanes

2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Product recommended and approved by insulation manufacturer, with demonstrated capability to secure insulation to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates and complying with other listed performance characteristics.



B. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints between units and filling voids in work.

C. Primer: Material recommended by insulation manufacturer where required for adhesion of insulation to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by insulation manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas to be insulated; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.

1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."

2. Verify compatibility with air barrier membrane.



3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, sealant or butyl tape to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, sealant or butyl tape as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves.

5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

D. Head-of-Wall Joints in Non-Rated Walls and Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Install insulation in miscellaneous voids, head-of-wall joints in non-rated walls, and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

a. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

b. Manufacturer's recommended sealant system.

2. Refer to Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint System" for head-of-wall sealant in rated walls.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.

B. Spray insulation to fill voids.

C. Apply in multiple passes to not exceed maximum thicknesses recommended by manufacturer. Do not spray into rising foam.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse



and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 072413 - 1

SECTION 072413 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that are field applied over substrate. 2. Water-resistive coatings.


1. Section 042200 “Concrete Unit Masonry” for coordination of joint locations.

2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in EIFS with elastomeric joint sealants and for perimeter joints between system and other materials.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASTM E 2110 apply to Work of this Section.

B. EIFS: Exterior insulation and finish system(s).

C. IBC: International Building Code.


A. Product Data: For each EIFS component, trim, and accessory, including water-resistive coatings.

B. Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details of penetration and termination, flashing details, joint locations and configurations, fastening and anchorage details including mechanical fasteners, and connections and attachments to other work. 1. Coordinate joint locations with adjacent concrete unit masonry work specified in other

sections.

C. Samples for Verification: 24-inch- square panels for each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work including custom trim, each profile.

1. Include exposed trim and accessory samples to verify color selected. 2. Include a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected, as specified in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."




A. Qualification Data: Submit name and qualification data for Installer and material supplier, indicating full compliance with specification requirements. Manufacturers who are not able to provide this information will not be considered. Architect and Owner reserve the right to reject roof Installer and/or material supplier if documentation of full compliance with specifications is not provided.

1. Submit certificate from manufacturer certifying that installer is an authorized installer of panels proposed for this Project.

2. Submit references from five different Architects or Owners for projects that have been in service for a minimum of two years, stating satisfactory performance of installation. Include contact information for Owner and Architect, size and location of project.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by EIFS manufacturer certifying the following:

1. EIFS complies with requirements. 2. Substrates to which EIFS is indicated to be attached are acceptable to EIFS manufacturer. 3. Accessory products installed with EIFS, including joint sealants, flashing, water-resistive

coatings, trim, whether or not furnished by EIFS manufacturer and whether or not specified in this Section, are acceptable to EIFS manufacturer.

C. Product Certificates: For insulation and joint sealant, from manufacturer.

D. Field quality-control reports and special inspection reports.

E. Evaluation Reports: For EIFS, including insulation water-resistive coatings, flexible membrane flashing, from ICC-ES.

F. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, to set quality standards for materials and execution, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Size: Provide mockups of size indicated on Drawings.





A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly identifying products.

B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and other causes.

1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. 2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating

materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F for a minimum of 24 hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate temperatures permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of joints with joints in other adjacent areas of Work specified in “Concrete Unit Masonry”.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Bond integrity and weathertightness. b. Deterioration of EIFS finishes and other EIFS materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Warranty coverage includes the following components of EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies:

a. EIFS finish, including base coats, finish coats, and reinforcing mesh. b. Insulation installed as part of EIFS including foam build-outs. c. Insulation adhesive. d. EIFS accessories, including trim components and flashing. e. Water-resistive coatings.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide drainable EIFS system, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by one of the following:

1. BASF Wall Systems (Synergy). 2. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 3. Parex USA, Inc. 4. Sto Corp.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with EIFS components.


A. EIFS Performance: Comply with ASTM E 2568 and with the following:

1. Weathertightness: Resistant to uncontrolled water penetration from exterior, with a means to drain water entering EIFS to the exterior.

2. System Fire Performance: Full-scale multistory fire test. 3. Structural Performance: EIFS assembly and components shall comply with ICC-

ES AC219 when tested according to ASTM E 2568.

a. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings.

4. Impact Performance: ASTM E 2568; Provide Ultra High impact resistance from grade up to 6’, provide High impact performance at heights greater than 6’above grade.

5. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between EIFS and substrates, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions.

6. Abrasion Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days and shows no cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts of sand when tested according to ASTM D 968, Method A.

7. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch clean glass substrate; cured for 28 days and shows no growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.3 EIFS MATERIALS

A. Primer/Sealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to protect substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate and insulation adhesive.

B. Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as water-resistive barriers; compatible with substrate and complying with physical and performance criteria of ASTM E 2570.



C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.

D. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use; specifically formulated to be applied to back side of insulation in a manner that creates open vertical channels designed to serve as an integral part of the water-drainage system of the EIFS-clad drainage-wall assembly; compatible with substrate; and complying with one of the following:

1. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and fillers specified for base coat.

2. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation designed for adhesive attachment of insulation to substrates of type indicated, as recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

E. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; and EIFS manufacturer's requirements for most stringent requirements for material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following:

1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less than six weeks.

2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, according to ASTM E 84.

3. Channeled Board Insulation: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-fabricated profile with linear, vertical-drainage channels, slots, or waves on the back side of board.

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. according to ASTM E 2098 and the following:

1. Reinforcing Mesh for EIFS, General: Not less than weight required to meet impact-performance level specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. 3. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. 4. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd.

G. Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with one of the following:

1. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and inert fillers to which only water is added at Project site.

2. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation of polymer-emulsion adhesive and inert fillers that is ready to use without adding other materials.

H. Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat.

I. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating with enhanced mildew resistance complying with the following:

1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers.

2. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



3. Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

J. Water: Potable.

K. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard cell class for use intended, and ASTM C 1063.

1. Casing Bead: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg.

2. Drip Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with face leg extended to form a drip, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg.

3. Weep Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with weepperforated face leg extended to form a drip and weep holes in track bottom, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg; designed to drain incidental moisture that gets into wall construction to the exterior at terminations of EIFS with drainage.

4. Expansion Joint: Prefabricated, one-piece V profile; designed to relieve stress of movement.

2.4 MIXING

A. Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.


1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry. 2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coats on other work.



B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of substrates.

C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.

3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 1397, ASTM E 2511, and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.

3.4 SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION

A. Primer/Sealer: Apply over sheathing substrates where required by EIFS manufacturer.

B. Water-Resistive Coating: Apply over sheathing to provide a water-resistive barrier.

1. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed water; seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where required by EIFS manufacturer. Prime substrates if required and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions and details.

3.5 TRIM INSTALLATION

A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. Coordinate with installation of insulation.

1. Weep Screed/Track: Use at bottom termination edges, at window and door heads of water-drainage EIFS unless otherwise indicated.

2. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings. 3. Casing Bead: Use at other locations.

3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397 and the following:

1. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method, with notches oriented vertically to produce drainage channels that remain functional after the insulation is adhered to substrate.

2. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for not less than 24 hours, before beginning rasping and sanding insulation or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh.

3. Apply insulation over substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented horizontally.

4. Begin first course of insulation from screed/track and work upward. Work from perimeter casing beads toward interior of panels if possible.



5. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches wide or 6 inches high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches from corners of window and door openings and not less than 4 inches from aesthetic reveals.

a. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches from horizontal and 4 inches from vertical joints in sheathing.

6. Interlock ends at internal and external corners. 7. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,

continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using adhesive or other material.

8. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes complying with details indicated.

9. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/16 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch. Prevent airborne dispersal and immediately collect insulation raspings or sandings.

10. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic reveals to less than 3/4 inch.

11. Install foam build-outs and attach to sheathing. 12. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated. 13. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges

and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh.

14. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within EIFS and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining surfaces of width indicated.

15. After installing insulation and before applying field-applied reinforcing mesh, fully wrap board edges. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not less than 2-1/2 inches over front and back face unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

16. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows:

a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat.

b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh.

c. At edges trimmed by accessories, extend base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat over face leg of accessories.

17. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and water-resistive barrier.

B. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as follows:

1. At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS.



2. Where EIFS adjoins dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other EIFS.

3. At floor lines in multilevel wood-framed construction. 4. Where wall height or building shape changes. 5. Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations.

3.7 BASE-COAT INSTALLATION

A. Waterproof Adhesive/Base Coat: To exposed surfaces of insulation, apply in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer over sloped surfaces foam build-outs.

B. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation and foam build-outs in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch dry-coat thickness.

C. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed reinforcing mesh in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with mesh continuous at corners, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are invisible.

D. Double-Layer Reinforcing-Mesh Application: Where indicated or required, apply second base coat and second layer of reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions in same manner as first application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.

E. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings, extending 4 inches beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- wide, strip reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4 inches on each side of corners.

1. At aesthetic reveals, apply strip reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches wide. 2. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh.

F. Foam Build-Outs: Fully embed reinforcing mesh in base coat.

G. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first application, except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.

3.8 FINISH-COAT INSTALLATION

A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations.




A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings.



UNDER-SLAB VAPOR RETARDER 072600 - 1

SECTION 072600 - UNDER-SLAB VAPOR RETARDER PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Products supplied under this section:

1. Vapor Retarder, seam tape, pipe boots, mastic for installation under concrete slabs.

B. Related sections: Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM E 1745-09 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.

2. ASTM E 154-99 (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover.

3. ASTM E 96-05 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 4. ASTM E 1643-09 Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor

Retarders used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 5. ASTM F 1249 Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film

and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor. 6. ASTM D 903 Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. ACI 302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials. Vapor Retarder component is not less than 10 mils thick.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control/Assurance:

1. Summary of test results as per paragraph 8.3 of ASTM E 1745. 2. Manufacturer’s samples, literature. 3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for placement, seaming and penetration repair

instructions. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder (Performance Based Specification)

1. Vapor Retarder membrane must have the following properties: a. Minimum 15 mil thick plastic geo-membrane



b. Manufactured with prime high-grade 100% virgin polyolefin resins c. Water Vapor Retarder-ASTM E 1745 meet or exceed Class A (Plastics) d. Water Vapor Transmission-ASTM E 96 - 0.003 perms or lower (g/hr/m2) e. Water Vapor Permeance-ASTM E 96 - 0.007 perms (US) or lower f. Puncture Resistance-ASTM E 1745, Class A-minimum 2200 grams g. Tensile Strength-ASTM E 1745, Class A-minimum 45.0 lbf./in.

B. Approved Manufacturers

1. Barrier-Bac VB350 16 mil manufactured by Inteplast Group, Lolita, TX – contact:(877-535-0555)- www.barrierbac.com.

2. Vapor Block 15 (mil) manufactured by Raven Industries- (800-635-3456)-www.ravenind.com

3. Griffolyn 15 mil manufactured by Reef Industries-(800-231-6074)-www.reefindustries.com

4. Moistop Ultra 15 (mil) manufactured by Fortifiber-(800-773-4777)-www.fortifiber.com

2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape: Tape manufactured and/or supplied by the approved manufacturers listed in section

2.1 Materials (B.)

1. Water Vapor PermeanUnder-Slab Vapor Retarderce –ASTM E96B-0.01 perms (maximum)

B. Pipe Boots: Construct Pipe Boots from Vapor Retarder material and pressure sensitive tape per

manufacturer’s instructions. C. Mastic: Mastic must have the following qualities.

1. Water Vapor Transmission ASTM E 96 – 0.3 perms or lower PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ensure that base material is approved by Architect or Geotechnical Engineer.

1. Level and compact base material. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E 1643.

1. Unroll vapor retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete placement.

2. Lap vapor retarder over footings and/or seal to foundation walls. 3. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s tape. 4. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions.



5. No penetration of the vapor retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.

7. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor retarder, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all sides with tape.



FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - 1

SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fluid-applied, vapor-permeable membrane air barriers.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 072413 “Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)” for

water resistive/air barrier coating provided as a component of EIFS system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air.

B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.

C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessory materials applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-leakage

and bond testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating

substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products. B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.

1. Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.

2. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier.

C. Product Test Reports: For each air-barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.




A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For exterior walls assemblies which include rigid foam insulation, provide components tested as indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Intermediate-Scale Multistory Fire Test: Tested mockup, representative of completed

multistory wall assembly, complies with NFPA 285 for test method and required fire-test-response characteristics of exterior non-load-bearing wall panel assemblies containing foam-plastic insulation.

2. If acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, provide engineering judgment by registered fire protection engineer in lieu of tested mockup.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution and for preconstruction testing. 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on field mockups. Refer to Section 014000.


A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air-barrier manufacturer. 1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance. 2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor- permeable air

barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and



transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 783.

2.3 VAPOR-PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR-BARRIER

A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified bituminous or synthetic polymer membrane. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :

a. Synthetic Polymer Membrane: 1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; Barritech VP. 2) Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier VPL. 3) Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 230.

2. Physical and Performance Properties:

a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.

b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M. c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material. Auxiliary materials shall be recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air barrier membrane. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide counterflashing, joint reinforcing, patching and transitions strips as standard with manufacturer.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material manufacturer.

C. Adhesive and Tape: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive adhesive tape.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners.

E. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft density; flame-spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer. 1. Products: Dow Great Stuff Pro and Great Stuff Pro Window and Door Insulating Foam

Sealant. F. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low

modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other

contaminants. 2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air-

barrier manufacturer. 3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Verify that masonry joints are

flush and completely filled with mortar. 4. Verfiy that masonry control joints are completely filled with urethane sealer.


3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.

B. At Contractor’s option: Apply parge coat or block filler to masonry substrate to provide a smooth substrate for application of air barrier. 1. Refer to Section 042200 “Concrete Unit Masonry” for application of parge coat. 2. Refer to Section 099113 “Exterior Painting” for application of block filler.

C. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

E. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.

F. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.

G. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

H. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

3.3 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces. 1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of air-barrier manufacturer's recommended

preparation coat extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joints and cracks. Apply a double thickness of fluid air-barrier material and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat.



3.4 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION A. General: Install strips, transition strips, and accessory materials according to air-barrier

manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. 1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base

flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 2. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of windows.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

C. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic.

E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Maintain a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact. Wrap rough openings with flexible flashing. After installation of windows, cover fins with transition strips.

G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.

H. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic.

I. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch- wide, strip.

J. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.

K. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction.

3.5 FLUID AIR-BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. General: Apply fluid air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply fluid air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. 1. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. 2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day.

Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.



B. Membrane Air Barriers: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in

writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 30-mil dry film thickness, applied in one or more equal coats, free of pinholes.

C. Apply strip and transition strip a minimum of 1 inch onto cured air-barrier material according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.

E. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions,

where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness. 2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above.

C. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required

by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more permitted time limits, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed membrane according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation.



CLAY ROOF TILES 073213 - 1

SECTION 073213 - CLAY ROOF TILES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Clay roof tiles. 2. Underlayment. 3. Ridge vents.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079, glossaries in TRI/WSRCA's "Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Design Criteria Installation Manual for Moderate Climate Regions," and NRCA's "NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.





B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1. Clay Roof Tiles: Full size, showing full range of values and blends. 2. Accessory Tiles: Full size. 3. Metal Valley Flashing: 12 inches square. 4. Ridge Vents: 12-inch-long Sample. 5. Fastenings: Wire-tie system components, 12 inches long.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of clay roof tile and accessory tile.

1. Include Samples of clay roof tiles and accessories involving color selection.



D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:

1. Clay Roof Tiles: Full size, showing full range of values and blends. 2. Accessory Tiles: Full size, each type. 3. Metal Valley Flashing: 12 inches square. 4. Ridge Vents: 12-inch-long Sample. 5. Fastenings: Wire-tie system components, 12 inches long.


A. Material Test Reports: For each type of clay roof tile, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Evaluation Reports: From ICC-ES or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that product is suitable for intended use under applicable building codes for the following:

1. Clay roof tiles, fasteners, and attachment systems. 2. Self-adhering underlayment.

C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's materials warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Clay Roof Tiles: 100 sq. ft. of each type, in unbroken bundles.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for clay roof tiles including related roofing materials.

a. Size: 48 inches long by 48 inches wide.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.





A. Store underlayment rolls in a dry, well-ventilated location protected from weather, sunlight, and moisture according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Store on end, on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls.

B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress.

C. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to prevent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members.


A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Materials Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace clay roof tiles that fail in materials within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Roofing Installer's Warranty: On warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of clay-tile roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Provide clay roof tiles and related roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for Class A fire resistance according to ASTM E 108 or UL 790 by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to



authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.2 CLAY ROOF TILES

A. Clay Roof Tiles: ASTM C 1167, molded- or extruded-clay roof tile units of shape and configuration indicated, kiln fired, and free of surface imperfections. Provide with fastening holes prepunched at factory before firing.


a. Boral Roofing; Boral Limited. b. Claymex Brick and Tile, Inc. c. Deleo Clay Tile. d. D'Hanis Brick & Tile Company. e. Gladding, McBean; a division of Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc. f. Ludowici Roof Tile. g. M.C.A. (Maruhachi Ceramics of America, Inc.). h. US Tile. i. Zion Tile Corporation.

2. Durability: Grade 3. 3. High-Profile Shape: Type I, Spanish or "S".

a. Accessory Tiles: Ridge, hip and hip starter, header course, and end band units.

4. Size: As selected by Architect.

5. Finish and Texture: Matte, smooth. 6. Color: Terra cotta.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M, a minimum of 40-mil-thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-modified-asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. 1. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; Dri-Start "A." 2. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Grace Ice and Water Shield. 3. Henry Company; Perma-Seal PE. 4. Johns Manville International, Inc.; Roof Defender.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586/D 4586M, Type II, asbestos free.



B. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane-based joint sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in clay-tile roofing and remain watertight.

D. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type IV.

E. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one- or two-part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with underlayments.

F. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type M, with ASTM C 979/C 979M, pigmented mortar matching the color of clay roof tiles for exposed-to-view mortar, and natural color for concealed-from-view mortar.

G. Foam Adhesive: Two-component, polyurethane expanding adhesive recommended for application by clay-roof-tile manufacturer.

H. Eave Closure: Manufacturer's standard EPDM eave closure formed to shape of clay roof tile.

I. Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber thread.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667, hot-dip galvanized-steel, 0.120-inch-diameter shank, sharp-pointed, conventional roofing nails with barbed shanks; minimum 3/8-inch-diameter head; of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into substrate or through thickness of the sheathing, whichever is less.

1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing.

B. Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire with low-profile metal or plastic caps, 1-inch minimum diameter.

1. Provide cap nails complying with written instructions of synthetic-underlayment manufacturer.

2. Provide with minimum 0.0134-inch-thick cap, and with minimum 0.105-inch-thick shank of length to penetrate at least 3/4 inch into roof sheathing.

C. Wire Ties: Stainless steel, 0.083-inch minimum diameter.

D. Single-Line, Wire-Tie System: Interconnecting eave-to-ridge system, minimum 0.106-inch-diameter galvanized-steel wire, preformed to accommodate clay roof tile type and application indicated.

E. Hook Nails: One-piece wind lock and clay roof tile fastener system, minimum 0.120-inch-diameter galvanized-steel wire, for direct deck nailing.



F. Tile Locks: Hot-dip galvanized-steel, 0.1-inch-diameter wire device designed to secure butt edges of overlaid clay roof tiles.

G. Storm Clips: Hot-dip galvanized-steel, minimum 0.048-by-1/2-inch strap-type, L-shaped retainer clips designed to secure side edges of clay roof tiles. Provide with two fastener holes in base flange.

2.6 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. General: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

B. Vent-Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch thick. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof and extending at least 4 inches from pipe onto roof.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through roofing.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with clay roof tile manufacturer's written instructions and with recommendations in NRCA's "NRCA Roofing Manual: Steep-Slope Roof Systems" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install wrinkle free; comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install lapped in direction that sheds water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches, staggered 24 inches between succeeding courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. Extend self-adhering sheet underlayment over entire roof deck. 2. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 24 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall.



3. Rakes: Extend from edges of rakes 24 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 4. Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side. 5. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot. 6. Sidewalls: Extend 18 inches beyond sidewalls and return vertically against sidewalls not

less than 4 inches. 7. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend 18 inches

beyond penetrating elements and return vertically against penetrating elements not less than 4 inches.

8. Roof-Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope.

3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Install metal flashings according to clay roof tile manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in NRCA's "NRCA Roofing Manual: Steep-Slope Roof Systems."

B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope tile roofing and up the vertical surface.

C. Step Flashings: Install with a head lap of 3 inches and extend both horizontally and vertically. Install with lower edge of flashing just upslope of, and concealed by, butt of overlying tile. Fasten to roof deck only.

D. Cricket and Backer Flashings: Install against roof-penetrating elements, extending concealed flange beneath upslope tile roofing and beyond each side.

E. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and tile roofing. Fasten and seal to tile roofing.

3.4 CLAY ROOF TILE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install clay roof tiles according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in TRI/WSRCA's "Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Design Criteria Installation Manual for Moderate Climate Regions" and NRCA's "NRCA Roofing Manual: Steep-Slope Roof Systems" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

1. Maintain uniform exposure and coursing of clay roof tiles throughout roof. 2. Extend tiles 2 inches over eave fasciae. 3. Nail Fastening: Drive nails to clear the clay roof tile so the tile hangs from the nail and is

not drawn up. 4. Wire-Tie Fastening: Install wire-tie systems and fasten clay roof tiles according to

manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Mortar Setting: Install clay roof tile according to TRI/FRSA's "Concrete and Clay Roof

Tile Installation Manual."



6. Foam-Adhesive Setting: Install clay roof tile according to TRI/FRSA's "Concrete and Clay Roof Tile Installation Manual."

7. Storm Clips: Install to capture edges of longitudinal sides of clay roof tiles and securely fasten to roof deck.

8. Tile Locks: Install to support and lock overlying tile butts to underlying tiles. 9. Cut and fit clay roof tiles neatly around roof vents, pipes, ventilators, and other

projections through roof. Fill voids with mortar. 10. Install clay roof tiles with color blend approved by Architect.

B. High-Profile Clay Roof Tile Installation:

1. Install tile eave closure. 2. Provide minimum 3-inch lap between succeeding courses of clay roof tiles. 3. Install ridge tiles with laps facing away from prevailing wind. Seal laps with asphalt

roofing cement.


A. Remove and replace damaged or broken clay roof tiles.

B. Remove excess clay roof tiles and debris from Project site.



METAL ROOF PANELS 074113 - 1

SECTION 074113 - METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Factory-formed standing-seam metal roof panels.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 053100 “Steel Decking” for steel roof decking. 2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for gutters and downspouts.

1.3 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The metal roofing system specified herein shall be the warranted system/product of a single manufacturer.

B. The incorporation of products not produced by the roofing manufacturer shall be required to be approved and recommended by the roofing manufacturer and shall be included within the roofing system warranty.

C. The General Contractor and his roofing subcontractor are prohibited from purchasing and manufacturing of flashings, copings, trim, gutters and downspouts; unless fully approved and warranted as part of the roofing system by the roofing system manufacturer.


A. General: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with performance requirements specified as determined by testing manufacturers' standard assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project, by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

B. Delegated Design: Design metal roof panel assemblies, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1. Professional engineer shall be legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.

C. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: Positive and negative 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.



D. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 20 percent of positive design wind pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. and not more than 12.0 lbf/sq. ft.

E. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance indicated.

1. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Corner Uplift Pressure: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 4. Manufacturer's system must be listed in "FM Approval Guide". (FM Research Standard

4471)

F. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:

1. Uniform Wind Load Capacity: Design, size and install components to withstand positive and negative wind loading pressures in accordance with wind load diagram on Structural Drawings.

2. Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: Engineer metal roof panel assemblies to withstand design loads with

vertical deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.

G. Seismic Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."

H. Thermal Movements: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer prepared shop drawings showing fabrication and installation layouts; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work.

1. Shop Drawings shall include Manufacturer's licensed Engineer's design calculations and certification of compliance with the loading requirements identified on the drawings and stated in the 2014 Florida Building Code. Also show location, placement and frequency of clips, fasteners and attachment required to withstand the design requirements for wind uplift resistance.



2. Accessories: Include details of flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

a. Flashing and trim. b. Snow guards.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Metal Roof Panels: 12 inches by 12 inches. Include fasteners, clips, closures, and other accessories.

2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Accessories: 12-inch long samples for each type of accessory.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: Include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Snow Retention System Calculations: Include calculation of number and location of snow guards based on snow load, roof slope, panel length and finish, and seam type and spacing.


A. Qualification Data: Submit name and qualification data for Installer and material supplier, indicating full compliance with specification requirements. Manufacturers who are not able to provide this information will not be considered. Architect and Owner reserve the right to reject roof Installer and/or material supplier if documentation of full compliance with specifications is not provided.

1. Submit certificate from manufacturer certifying that installer is an authorized installer of panels proposed for this Project.

2. Submit references from five different Architects or Owners for projects that have been in service for a minimum of two years, stating satisfactory performance of installation. Include contact information for Owner and Architect, size and location of project.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for the following:

1. Metal Roof Panels: Include reports for air infiltration, water penetration, fire-test-response characteristics, and structural performance.

2. Underlayment: Include reports for thermal resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission, and water absorption.

C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.




A. Metal roofing work shall be directly sub-contracted by the General Contractor to a roofing company that specializes in the installation of metal roofing and has an on-going business relationship with the manufacturer, whose product is to be supplied for this project. Brokering or sub-subcontracting of metal roofing work is unacceptable and will not be allowed.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturing firm that has specialized in the manufacture of metal roofing of the type specified and has been in standard production of the types of panels specified for at least 15 years.

1. Manufacturer is responsible for the preparation of data for metal roof panels, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

2. Manufacturer shall provide the technical inspection such that manufacturer's intent and contractor's efforts remain coordinated.

C. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved and authorized by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.

1. The installer shall demonstrate and offer written attested certification that he has installed; a minimum of 500 squares (50,000 sq. ft.) per year for each of the past three years, of the material that he is bidding.

a. Installation of other types of panels, or another manufacturer's goods is not considered as meeting the above requirement.

b. Installer shall have been in business under its present name for at least 5 years prior to the start of this project.

2. The installer shall substantiate a track record of the manufacturer's working with the installer, for five consecutive years, and at a scale of operations cited above.

3. The Crew Chief/Foreman, shall be physically on-site, directly supervising the Work, during the entire period of installation of roof panel system.

4. Installation Crew - Chief/Forman shall be trained and certified by the roofing system manufacture and shall have on their person an identification card, certifying completion of training and approval of the manufacturer for the roofing system being installed. The installer shall have been actively installing the type of roofing system defined in these specifications for a minimum of 3 years.

D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal roof panels identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panel through one source from a single manufacturer.



F. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of metal roof panels and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Section 016000 "Product Requirements."

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel assemblies including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, Installer, manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal roof panels including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review methods and procedures related to installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members.

5. Review structural loading limitations of deck during and after roofing. 6. Review flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, and condition of

other construction that will affect metal roof panels. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing

and inspecting if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements during and after installation. 9. Review observation and repair procedures after installation. 10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish

copy of record to each participant.

H. Roofing Inspections: Make required notifications, secure required inspections and pay fees such that the specified systems warranty are assured at the time of completion of the Work.

1. Contractor and Manufacturer's assigned representative shall inspect and warrant the Work as a condition of acceptance.

2. Manufacturer shall provide a technical representative for start-up of installation, and progress inspections at 25 percent, 50 percent and a final inspection with reports to the Installer, General Contractor and Architect/Owner. Deficiencies shall be listed on the inspection reports and all repairs/corrections made and certified completed and approved with next and final report.

3. Manufacturer's Final Completion/Warranty Inspection: Upon completion of the Work and prior to final payment, the metal roofing manufacturer's representative, in the presence of the Owner and Architect, shall inspect the metal roofing Work. Discrepancies shall be recorded and immediately rectified. Final payment will not be issued until the manufacturer's representative has given his certification/approval of Work and close-out submittals, including Roofing Warranties and roof maintenance instructions, have been received by the Architect. Warranties issued prior to final inspection are not acceptable and shall not qualify for release of final payment for roofing work.




A. Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store panels to ensure dryness. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Protect strippable protective covering on panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of panel installation.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal roof panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof panels by field measurements before fabrication.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate metal roof panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Panel Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's project specific form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard or customized weathertightness warranty form, non-prorated, without monetary limitation (NDL), including wind speed warranty, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. The warranty coverage shall include all flashings, penetrations, underlayment, field

applied gutter liner material and edge details as part of the weathertightness warranty.



3. The design wind speed shall be specifically called out/indicated in the warranty. 4. Wind Speed Warranty provision: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam

metal roof panel assemblies that fail at wind speeds less than the design speeds specified, within specified warranty period.

a. Warranty shall not carry exclusions for named storms or hurricanes unless the storm's documented wind speeds exceed those specified for the design and construction of the roofing system.

C. Warranty Plaque: The Contractor shall provide a roof warranty plaque, for mounting. The plaque shall have a warning stating the following:

"Prior to making modifications or repairs to the existing roof, approval for modifications and repairs from the manufacturer, must be obtained. All work on existing warranted roofing system shall be performed so as to maintain existing warranties. Work that would void warranties is prohibited. Entities performing work that would void existing roof warranties shall be liable for cost to make necessary repairs, required to reinstate warranties."

1. The plaque shall also contain the name of the manufacturer, serial number of warranty, date of issue of the warranty, length of warranty and names and telephone numbers of manufacturer contacts. The plaque shall be covered/protected by a clear acrylic/polycarbonate sheet screwed or otherwise attached to substrate of plaque, which shall be sealed wood, plastic or other suitable non-corrosive metal. Provide one at each access ladder/hatch or at location(s) to be selected during construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Factory-Fabricated Steel Roof Panels: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Centria (Basis of Design) 2. Bemo, USA 3. Construction Metal Products, Inc. 4. Dimensional Metals, Inc. 5. IMETCO/Garland 6. MBCI 7. McElroy Metal, Inc. 8. Merchant & Evans, Inc. 9. Metal Roofing Systems 10. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation 11. Morin, a Kingspan Group Company 12. Petersen Aluminum Corporation

2.2 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.



1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; structural quality.

2. Surface: Smooth finish with intermediate striations. 3. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating, as specified or indicated on

Drawings.

a. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1) Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2605, except as modified below:

a) Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours.

4. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

B. Panel Sealants:

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.

2.3 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.

1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514.

B. Vertical-Rib, Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and striated pan between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together.

1. Material: Metallic-coated steel sheet, 0.028 inch nominal thickness (24 gauge) or greater, as required to meet performance requirements.

a. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range.



2. Clips: Floating to accommodate thermal movement.

a. Material: 0.0625-inch thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated (galvalume) steel sheet designed to withstand negative-load requirements.

3. Joint Type: Single or double folded. 4. Panel Coverage: 16 inches. 5. Panel Height: Minimum 2 inches. 6. Length: Provide panels in full lengths from ridge to eave without end laps.


A. Self-Adhering, High Temperature Sheet Underlayment: Minimum of 30- to 40-mil- thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer where recommended by manufacturer for surfaces to receive underlayment.

1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 3. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. b. Grace, W. R. & Co. c. Henry Company d. IMETCO e. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC f. Owens Corning

B. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating.

B. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.064 inch. 2. Depth: 1-1/2 inches or as indicated on Drawings.

C. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.


A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

1. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners.



2. Blind Fasteners: High-strength stainless-steel rivets.

B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

C. Non-Penetrating Fasteners: Use S-5 clips by Metal Roof Innovations, LTD. or architect approved equivalent non-penetrating mechanical fasteners for attachment, connection and support of accessories to ribs of roofing system.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories: Provide components required for a complete panel assembly including trim, copings, fascia, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of panels, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels.

2. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum 0.0250-inch thick, stainless-steel or nylon-coated aluminum sheet.

3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer.

4. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.030-inch thick, aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fascia, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent panels.

C. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

1. Field roll forming is prohibited.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.

C. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.



1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

2. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.

4. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal roof panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.



B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Examine solid roof decking to verify that decking joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.

2. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation.

3. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates, including removing projections capable of interfering with installation.

B. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."



C. Miscellaneous Framing: Install eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel support members and anchorage according to manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof decking boards. Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in wrinkle free, shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Extend underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3.4 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations.

B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at one and only one location for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners.

1. Point of Fixity: Fasten each panel along a single line of fixing located at eave, or as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal movement.

C. Install metal roof panels as follows:

1. Commence metal roof panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq. ft. in presence of factory-authorized representative.

2. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted. 3. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 4. Provide metal closures at rake edges, rake walls, and each side of ridge and hip caps. 5. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of

all openings. 6. Install ridge and hip caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. 7. Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels.

D. Fasteners for Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and interior.

E. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions.

F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by



applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

1. Coat back side of roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

G. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.

1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation

instructions. 3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool

so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.

3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).



C. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer.


A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform inspections and prepare reports.

1. Water Testing: Perform test in accordance with AAMA 501.2 "Field Check for Water Leakage" on a portion of completed panel system at Architect's direction. In the event that such testing should result in uncontrolled leakage, eliminate the causes of such leakage at no additional cost. Remedial measures must maintain standards of quality and durability and are subject to approval. Provide powered scaffold or lift, hose and manpower. Contractor shall schedule and coordinate Field Water Testing of this section.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform inspections of metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.

1. Roof panel manufacturer shall provide weekly inspections in addition to other milestone inspections called for. Inspections shall be conducted by a salaried employee of the manufacturer. Manufacturer shall inform Architect of the assigned inspector prior to the start of roofing installation. Inspections by persons other than those of the manufacturer are unacceptable. A written report shall be submitted to the Architect and Contractor within 48 hours of the inspection.

C. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


LS3P Westside Shoppes – Buildings A-D LS3P 9103-146340

Orlando, Orange County, Florida

PERMIT SET - 08 OCTOBER 2015

THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1

SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system.

2. Roof insulation.


1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashings.

3. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for reglets and counterflashings.

4. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for roof hatches and pipe supports.

5. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.

B. R-Value: Long-term thermal resistance: Determined in accordance with CAN/ULC-S770 and

ASTM C1289, Annex A1.



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.

2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.

3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing.

4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.






A. Qualification Data: Submit name and qualification data for qualified roofing Installer and

membrane manufacturer, indicating full compliance with specification requirements. Architect

and Owner reserve the right to reject roof Installer and/or membrane manufacturer if

documentation of full compliance with specifications is not provided.

1. Submit certificate from manufacturer certifying that Installer has been trained by the

manufacturer and is an authorized/certified installer of the specific roof membrane

proposed for this Project.

2. The Installer through the Contractor shall submit references, stating satisfactory

performance of installation, from five different Architects or Owners for projects that the

Installer has completed and have been in service for a minimum of two years. Include

complete contact information, also completion date, size and location of project.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system

complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of roofing system's compliance with building code in

effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report with written

approval as to specification compliance and acceptance of completed roofing system

installation.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

H. Manufacturer's Application/Installation Instructions.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Roofing work shall be directly sub-contracted by the General Contractor to a roofing company

that specializes in the specified type of roofing and has an on-going business relationship with

one of the specified manufacturers, whose product is to be supplied. Brokering or sub-

subcontracting of roofing work is unacceptable and will not be allowed.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has FM or Florida Building Code

Approvals approved for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project.





1. A manufacturing firm that has specialized in the manufacture of membrane roofing of the

type specified and has been in standard production of the type of membrane specified for

at least 10 years.

2. The manufacturer shall provide all materials marketed and labeled by a single source for

a complete system; sheet goods, weldable flashings, coated metals, corrosion resistant

fastenings, sealants, adhesives, primers, seam caulk, and all other components which may

be required for this roof to receive a 20 year warranty.

3. Manufacturer shall provide the technical inspection such that manufacturer's intent and

contractor's efforts remain coordinated.

C. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane

roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive

manufacturer's special warranty.

1. The installer shall demonstrate and offer written attested certification that he has

installed; a minimum of 500 squares (50,000 sq. ft.) per year for each of the past three

years, of the material that he is bidding.

a. Installation of other types of membranes, or another manufacturer's goods is not

considered as meeting the above requirement.

b. Installer shall have been in business under its present name for at least 5 years

prior to start of this project.

2. The installer shall substantiate a track record of the manufacturer's working with the

installer, for three consecutive years, and at a scale of operations cited above.

3. The Crew Chief/Foreman, shall be physically on-site, directly supervising the Work,

during the entire period of installation of roof membrane.

a. Crew Chief/Forman shall be trained and certified by the roofing system

manufacturer and shall have on their person an identification card, certifying

completion of training and approval of the manufacturer for the roofing system

being installed. The installer shall have been actively installing the type of roofing

system defined in these specifications for a minimum of 3 years.

b. Quality Incident Rate: Less than 5.0.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain components, including adhesives, for membrane roofing system

from same manufacturer as membrane roofing.

1. The roofing system specified herein shall be the warranted system/product of a single

manufacturer.

2. The incorporation of products not specifically by the roofing manufacturer shall be

recommended and approved by the roofing manufacturer and shall be included within the

roofing system warranty.

3. Pre-manufactured roof curbs may carry their own warranty but the flashing of these curbs

into the roofing system shall be included in the roofing system warranty.

E. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency

representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck





Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers

of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's

written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,

including flatness and fastening and wind uplift.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after

installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

F. Roofing Inspections: Make required notifications, secure required inspections and pay fees

such that the specified systems warranty are assured at the time of completion of the Work.

1. Contractor and Manufacturer's assigned representative shall inspect and warrant the Work

as a condition of acceptance.

2. Manufacturer shall provide project start-up guidance and direction at start of installation

and then provide inspections by manufacturer's technical inspector at 25 percent, 50

percent and final, with inspection reports submitted to the Roofing Installer, General

Contractor and Architect/Owner. Deficiencies shall be listed on the inspection reports and

all repairs/corrections made and certified completed and approved by the inspector

submitted with next and final report.

3. Manufacturer's Final Completion/Warranty Inspection: Upon completion of the Work

and prior to final payment, the roofing manufacturer's representative, in the presence of

the Owner and Architect, shall inspect the roofing Work. Discrepancies shall be recorded

and immediately rectified. Final payment will not be issued until the manufacturer's

representative has given his certification/approval of the Work and close-out submittals,

including Roofing Warranties and roof maintenance instructions, have been received by

the Architect. Warranties issued prior to final inspection are not acceptable and shall not

qualify for release of final payment for roofing work.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled

with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or

listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.





B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location

and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored

liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated

shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,

moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent

deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions

and warranty requirements.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized weathertightness warranty

form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

1. Special project warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation,

fasteners, cover boards, roofing accessories, manufacturer's edge metal products and

other components of membrane roofing system.

2. Provide manufacturer's standard wind warranty.


4. System Warranty: As a part of the work of this Section, pay all required fees, secure all

required inspections, and do all things necessary to secure and deliver to the Owner a

Total System Warranty from the manufacturer of the approved materials.

B. Warranty Plaque: The Contractor shall provide a roof warranty plaque for mounting on the wall

beside the roof access ladder/hatch. The plaque shall have a warning stating the following:

"Prior to making modifications or repairs to the existing roof, approval for modifications and

repairs from the manufacturer, must be obtained. All work on existing warranted roofing system

shall be performed so as to maintain existing warranties. Work that would void warranties is

prohibited. Entities performing work that would void existing roof warranties shall be liable for

cost to make necessary repairs required to reinstate warranties."

1. The plaque shall also contain the name of the manufacturer, serial number of warranty,

date of issue of the warranty, length of warranty, and names and telephone numbers of

manufacturer contacts. Include a copy of the warranty. The plaque shall be

covered/protected by a clear acrylic/polycarbonate sheet screwed or otherwise attached to





substrate of plaque, which shall be sealed wood, plastic or non-corrosive metal. Provide

one at each access ladder/hatch or at location to be selected during construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified

uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane

roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when

tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to

ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under

conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing

manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that

have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift

pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: Refer to Structural Drawings for load requirements.

2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: Refer to Structural Drawings for load requirements.

3. Corner Uplift Pressure: Refer to Structural Drawings for load requirements.

D. Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials that

comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a

membrane roofing system, that is listed with FM Approvals' "RoofNav", Miami Dade, or

Florida Building Code for Class 1, as applicable. Identify materials with submitted assembly

Agency Approvals markings.

1. Hail Resistance: MH.

2. Fire: FM 1A or UL Class A.

E. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, UL, & FM, Class A; for application and roof slopes

indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing

agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

F. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies

identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.





2.2 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, uniform, flexible sheet

formed from a thermoplastic polyolefin, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, and as follows:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Carlisle SynTec Systems

b. Firestone Building Products Company

c. GAF Materials Corporation

d. GenFlex Roofing Systems

e. Versico

2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.

3. Exposed Face Color: White.

2.3 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer

for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing,

55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Slip Sheet (if required by Manufacturer): Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for

application.

E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,

approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

F. Metal Battens (if required by Manufacturer): Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-

coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.

G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-

resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and

acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,

preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination

reglets, and other accessories.

2.4 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO membrane

roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of

thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Approvals-approved roof insulation.





B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber

mat facer on both major surfaces. R-Value as indicated on Drawings.

C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch

per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where

indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for

intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.

B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach

roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:

1. Modified Asphaltic Insulation Adhesive: Modified asphalt, asbestos-free, cold-applied

adhesive.

2. Bead-Applied Insulation Adhesive: Bead-applied, low-rise, one- or multicomponent

urethane adhesive.

3. Full-Spread Applied Insulation Adhesive: Spray-applied, low-rise, two-component

urethane adhesive.

C. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, factory-

primed. Thickness as indicated on Drawings or as required to meet manufacturer's wind uplift

and warranty requirements.


a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck

b. National Gypsum; DEXcell

c. United States Gypsum; Securock

d. Roofing membrane manufacturer’s tested, approved, and warranted cover board

that is equivalent to specified product.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the

following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at

penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with

requirements in Section 053100 "Steel Decking."






3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation

according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or

migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking

place or when rain is forecast.

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from

entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is

forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to

precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for

installing roof insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install insulation to achieve required thickness. Install two or more layers with joints of each

succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each

direction.

E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does

not restrict flow of water.

F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints

staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch

with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:

1. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive,

firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints

staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each

direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.

1. Fasten cover boards according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for

specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

I. Install slip sheet over cover board and immediately beneath membrane roofing if required by

membrane manufacturer.





3.4 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written

instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.

B. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions

required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by

manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of

roofing.

E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and

perimeter of roofing.

F. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and

sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam

installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut

edges of sheet.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.

H. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with

clamping ring.

3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to

membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive per the manufacturer's application instructions. Do not apply to seam

area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet

flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side

and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through

termination bars.






A. Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect substrate and

conditions prior to installation of roofing components and to monitor installation of roofing as

required to issue warranty.

B. Final Roof Inspection: Upon completion of the Work and prior to final payment, the membrane

manufacturer's representative, in the presence of the Owner and Architect, shall inspect Work.

Discrepancies shall be recorded and immediately rectified. Final payment will not be issued

until the manufacturer's representative has given his approval for Work and closeout submittals,

including roof maintenance manual and warranties, have been received by the Architect.

1. Notify Architect and Owner 5 business days in advance of the date and time of

inspection.

C. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, and repair seam sample areas.

D. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections

indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.7 Patching LIMITATIONS AND CLEANING requirements

A. Patching Restrictions: No more than 5 (in field) patches and no more than a total of 4 linear

feet of seam patching per 100 sq. ft. of roof total sq. footage and no more than 5 patches and no

seam patches exceeding a total of 4 linear feet in any 100 sq. ft. roofing area as determined by

Owner. Seam patches shall be minimum 8 inches wide and 24 inches long strip patch.

Manufacturer required circular seam intersection patches shall not be considered when

calculating number of patches. Typical patch size shall be minimum 6 inches square with

rounded corners or as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. The use of large size

patches (covering multiple penetrations) to avoid exceeding the limits set forth above will not

be permitted. The use of large patches in excess of 24 by 36 inches shall be justification for

replacement or for providing over lay membrane.

1. Any area in excess of patching limits set fort above shall be replaced with new membrane

or overlaid with a new minimum 100 sq. ft un-patched membrane. Exact location and

extent of new overlay membrane shall be determined by the Owner and membrane

manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Final Acceptance Inspection and Cleaning: Roof surface shall be inspected for damage, trash

and waste materials. Remove all such items, and all spilled materials per manufacturer's

removal instructions. Sweep clean and wash membrane to optimum cleanliness. Hand mop and

hose clean (low pressure) with environmentally friendly (green) cleaners as recommended by

roof membrane manufacturer. High pressure washers are not allowed. Final payment will not be

made until this work has been completed and accepted.

C. Photographic Record: Upon completion of the roofing system the installer shall photo document

the entire roof area to establish completion and condition. General Contractor shall assume





responsibility for subsequent damage caused by construction operations carried out on/above

completed roof system.

3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction

period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for

deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to

Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with

requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition

free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty

requirements.

C. Daily Cleaning: Provide daily cleaning prior to stopping roofing work each day. Cleaning shall

include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Picking up and storing all lose items,

2. Sweeping clean roof surface,

3. Removal and cleaning of all stains and spills.

D. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Formed Products:

a. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. b. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. c. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. d. Formed equipment support flashing.


1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for embedded flashing materials. 2. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 3. Section 075423 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for installing sheet metal

flashing and trim integral with membrane roofing. 4. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured roof specialties not part of sheet

metal flashing and trim. 5. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for roof hatches and pipe supports.


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.



A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:



1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.

2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.

3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and

counterflashings as applicable. 6. Details of special conditions. 7. Details of connections to adjoining work. 8. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples: For each type of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory indicated with factory-applied color finishes involving color selection.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and

attachment to structural members. 4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and

condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing. 5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish

copy of record to each participant.



1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Color: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.


A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment

B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.



E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams.

1. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 2. Coated Metals: Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise

recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

3. Uncoated Aluminum: Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.



2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and flat-stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Profile: K-style. 2. Expansion Joints: Butt type with cover plate. 3. Accessories: Continuous, removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and hardware

cloth screen. 4. Material: Aluminum, 0.040 inch thick.

B. Downspouts: Fabricate downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.

1. Profile: K-style. 2. Material: Aluminum, 0.040 inch thick.

2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Base Flashing: Fabricate from 0.040 inch thick aluminum.

B. Counterflashing: Refer to Section 077100 "Roof Specialties."

C. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from 0.040 inch thick aluminum.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Roofing membrane manufacturer’s approved system.

E. Roof-Drain Flashing: Roofing membrane manufacturer’s approved system.

2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Through-Wall Flashing: Refer to Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch high, end dams. Fabricate from 0.040 inch thick aluminum.

1. Refer to Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for flexible flashings.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from 0.040 inch thick aluminum.

B. Pipe Penetrations: Premolded rubber or roof membrane manufacturer’s recommended elastomeric type.

1. Provide stainless steel clamp ring, sealant, and fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored. 3. Verify that weather barriers have been installed over sheathing to prevent air infiltration

or water penetration.

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.



A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.



1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with a slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into

joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for

stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.

G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.

3.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.

B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.

1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter.



2. Anchor gutter with gutter brackets or straps spaced not more than 30 inches apart to roof deck, unless otherwise indicated, and loosely lock to front gutter bead.

3. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints.

1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.

2. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.

3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

C. Counterflashing: Refer to Section 077100 "Roof Specialties."

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.6 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."

C. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.

1. Install flexible flashings in accordance with Section 072500 "Weather Barriers."

3.7 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.

B. Pipe Penetration Flashing: Install in accordance with roofing membrane manufacturer’s written instructions.




A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - 1

SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copings. 2. Reglets and counterflashings.


1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 075423 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for coordination with roofing

and gravel stop installation. 3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and trim. 4. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for roof hatches and other manufactured roof

accessory units. 5. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants between roof specialties and

adjacent materials.


A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Except as otherwise shown on Drawings or specified, the workmanship of sheet metal work, method for forming joints, anchoring, cleating and provisions for expansion shall conform to the standard details and recommendations of the Copper and Brass Research Association; and workmanship shall be of the best quality, in accordance with best trade practice and the recommendations and specifications of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

C. FM Approvals' Listing: Manufacture and install roof-edge specialties and flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify materials with FM Approvals' markings.

D. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install roof-edge specialties and flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures:

1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components,



failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.



A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction.

2. Pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. 3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 4. Details of special conditions.

C. Samples: For each type of roof specialty indicated with factory-applied color finishes.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for roof-edge specialties, copings, and flashings.



A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of roof specialties from a single source from single manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical roof edge approximately 20 feet long, including supporting construction, seams, attachments, and accessories.




1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roof specialties including installers of roofing materials and accessories.



2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members.

3. Review special roof details and condition of other construction that will affect roof specialties.


A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof specialties installation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with roof-edge specialties, copings, and flashings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal

surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.

b. Color: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 CONCEALED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.



B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.

D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.4 COPINGS

A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps.


a. ATAS International, Inc. b. Hickman Company, W. P. c. Metal-Era, Inc. d. Metal Roofing Systems e. Petersen Aluminum Corporation

2. Coping-Cap Material: Formed aluminum, 0.050 inch thick; or thickness as required to meet performance requirements.

3. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded. 4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on, fabricated from coping-cap material.

a. Snap-on-Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches wide, with integral cleats.

2.5 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:



1. Fry Reglet Corporation. 2. Hickman Company, W. P. 3. Metal-Era, Inc. 4. MM Systems Corporation.

B. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal:

1. Material: Aluminum, 0.040 inch thick. 2. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded. 3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with

neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

C. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal:

1. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.



B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.

C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.



1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.

1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer and as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

3.3 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor copings to meet performance requirements.

1. Interlock face leg and back leg drip edges on snap-on coping cap into cleated anchored plates anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements.

3.4 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Coordinate installation of reglets and counterflashings with installation of base flashings.



B. Embedded Reglets: See Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installation of reglets.

C. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings.

D. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashings 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof hatches. 2. Pipe supports.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for ladder to access roof hatches. 2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal trim and accessories. 3. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for copings, reglets, and counterflashing.


A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.


A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color.


A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. 2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. 3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,

piping, and conduit. 4. Required clearances.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 620. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.

2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used, otherwise mill finished.

C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated.



D. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, thickness as indicated.

C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

E. Underlayment:

1. Self-Adhering, High Temperature Sheet: Refer to Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

2. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.

F. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

G. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

H. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.

I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.3 ROOF HATCH

A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lid and insulated double-walled curb, welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and weathertight perimeter gasketing, integral metal cant, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.


a. Babcock-Davis b. Bilco Company c. J. L. Industries, Inc.



d. Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. e. Nystrom f. O’Keefes Inc. g. Pate Company

B. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, minimum 48 by 48 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

C. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal uplift load.

D. Hatch Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.090 inch thick.

1. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E. Construction:

1. Insulation: Glass-fiber board. 2. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal

liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. 3. Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb. 4. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. 5. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter

curb height that is tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surfaces of perimeter curb are level. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.

F. Hardware: Stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles, pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.

G. Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's safety railing system including rails, clamps, fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation; attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. 2. Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches in diameter or galvanized-steel tube,

1-5/8 inches in diameter. 3. Flat Bar: Galvanized steel, 2 inches high by 3/8 inch thick. 4. Maximum Opening Size: System constructed to prevent passage of a sphere 21 inches in

diameter. 5. Chain Passway Barrier: Galvanized proof coil chain with quick link on fixed end. 6. Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with prefabricated

end fittings. 7. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of

handrail and railing members. 8. Fabricate joints exposed to weather to be watertight. 9. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system. 10. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.




H. Ladder-Assist Post: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof-access ladder.

1. Operation: Post locks in place on full extension; release mechanism returns post to closed position.

2. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. 3. Material: Steel tube. 4. Post: 1-5/8-inch diameter pipe. 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat.


2.4 PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Pipe Supports: Adjustable-height, extruded-aluminum tube, filled with urethane insulation; 2 inches in diameter; with aluminum baseplate, EPDM base seal, manufacturer's recommended hardware for mounting to structure or structural roof deck as indicated, and extruded-aluminum carrier assemblies; suitable for quantity of pipe runs and sizes.

1. Roller Assembly: With stainless-steel roller, sized for supported pipes. 2. Pipe Support Flashing: Manufacturer's standard insulated sleeve flashing with integral

base flange; aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch thick. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.



B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.



2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads. 3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete

installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. 4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or

loosening of fasteners and seals.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with a slip sheet.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof accessories for waterproof performance.

C. Roof-Hatch Installation:

1. Install roof hatch so top surface of hatch curb is level. 2. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating

mechanism and hardware. 3. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb.

D. Pipe Support Installation: Install pipe supports so top surfaces are in contact with and provide equally distributed support along length of supported item.

E. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.

B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Clean off excess sealants.

E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 1

SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM).


1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for surface conditions required for structural steel receiving sprayed fire-resistive materials.

2. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for fire-resistance-rated firestopping systems. 3. Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistance-rated joint systems.

C. Special Notice:

1. Unless specifically noted otherwise, the steel structure shall be considered "unrestrained" in accordance with the fire exposure and acceptance criteria specified in ASTM E 119 for the purpose of determining the thickness of spray-applied fireproofing.

2. Calculation Requirements:

a. For steel beams complying with UL Designs indicated on Drawings and W/D values required by South Carolina Building Code, Contractor shall provide fireproofing thickness as required by UL Design.

b. For steel beams not complying with UL Design indicated on Drawings and W/D values required by South Carolina Building Code, Contractor is responsible to have the W/D ratio, weight-to-heated-perimeter, calculated and provide fireproofing thickness as required to meet UL Designs and South Carolina Building Code.



1. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying fireproofing materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:

1. Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying fireproofing. 2. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating, including the

following:

a. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



1) For steel joist assemblies, include applicable fire-resistance design designations, with each steel joist tested with the same maximum tensile stress as each steel joist indicated on Drawings. Design designations with steel joists tested at lower maximum tensile stress than those indicated are not permitted.

b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of structural components and assemblies.

3. Treatment of fireproofing after application.


A. Calculations: Provide W/D calculations and a schedule of fireproofing thicknesses required for each beam size scheduled.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing, signed by product manufacturer.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From fireproofing manufacturer indicating the following:

1. Materials have been tested for bond with substrates. 2. Materials have been verified by fireproofing manufacturer to be compatible with

substrate primers and coatings. 3. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for proposed fireproofing.

F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES.

G. Field quality-control test and special inspection reports.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its fireproofing to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing for each fire-resistance design from single manufacturer.

C. Fireproofing Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Owner to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods.



1. Fireproofing materials are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Testing is performed on specimens of fireproofing that comply with laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-resistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application.

3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens.

D. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods.

1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.

2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with fireproofing materials.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fireproofing with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify bags containing fireproofing with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for SFRM serving as direct-applied protection tested per ASTM E 119.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84.

F. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."

G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative: A manufacturer's representative/fire protection specialist shall be on-site during application of mock-up and start-up of fireproofing installation.

H. Mockups: For fireproofing, apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Extent of Mockups: Approximately 100 sq. ft. of surface for each product indicated. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.



A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for delivery, storage and handling of fireproofing materials. Protect fireproofing materials from freezing.



B. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if applicable, and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.

C. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard materials whose shelf life has expired.

D. Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 50 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing material dries thoroughly.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and patch any damaged or removed areas.

B. Sequence and coordinate application of fireproofing with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements:

1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the environment.

2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fireproofing material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity, temperature, and ventilation.

3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fireproofing material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application.

4. Do not apply fireproofing material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply fireproofing material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing material.

5. Do not apply fireproofing material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping has been completed.

6. Do not begin applying fireproofing material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in place.

7. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing material until application of fire protection is completed.

8. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective applications.



C. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections of these Specifications in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total fireproofing system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using coatings specified over substrates primed by others.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form signed by Contractor and by Installer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fireproofings that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling; or delaminating of fireproofing from substrates.

b. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

C. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.

2.2 CONCEALED SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS


1. Carboline Company 2. Grace, W. R. & Co. 3. Isolatek International 4. Southwest Fireproofing Products Co.

B. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum plaster binders, additives, and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application.



C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property as follows:

1. Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. for average and individual densities, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."

2. Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance design indicated according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch, per ASTM E 605:

a. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of 1 inch or more, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the design thickness minus 0.25 inch.

b. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1 inch but more than 0.375 inch, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the greater of 0.375 inch or 75 percent of the design thickness.

c. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-resistance designs whose fire-resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 lb/cu. ft..

3. Bond Strength: 200 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory testing of 0.75-inch minimum thickness of SFRM.

4. Compressive Strength: 750 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch and minimum dry density shall be as specified but not less than 15 lb/cu. ft.

5. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 6. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 7. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759. 8. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760. 9. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours per ASTM E 859. For

laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 0.75 inch, maximum dry density is 15 lb/cu. ft., test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours.

10. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.

11. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.

2.3 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary fireproofing materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fireproofing product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements:

1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736.



2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Fireproofing Material: Product approved by manufacturer of fireproofing.

D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated and fireproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive fireproofing.

E. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Include pins and attachment.

F. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:

1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified.

2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.

3. Objects penetrating fireproofing material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying fireproofing material.

B. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related work are completed.

C. Conduct tests according to fireproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.


E. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which fireproofing application will be performed for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting coating performance.



1. Proceed with fireproofing application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving coating are thoroughly dry.

2. Start of coating will be construed as the Applicator's approval of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing material, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

D. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.

E. For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fireproofing products after application.

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fireproofing material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

B. Apply fireproofing that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting test results.

C. Install metal lath, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings and fireproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath to substrate in position required for support and reinforcement of fireproofing material. Use anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer. Attach accessories where indicated or required for secure attachment of lath to substrate.

D. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fireproofing material where required to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer for material and application indicated.

E. Extend fireproofing material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer, install body of fireproofing covering in a single course.



F. Spray apply fireproofing materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

3.4 APPLICATION, SPRAY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIAL

A. Apply SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve unrestrained fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if indicated.

B. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of material and matching Architect's sample or, if none, finish approved for field-erected mockup.

C. Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes:

1. Spray-textured finish with no further treatment. 2. Even, spray-textured finish, produced by rolling flat surfaces of fire-protected members

with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness. 3. Skip-troweled finish with leveled surface, smoothed-out texture, and neat edges. 4. Smooth, troweled finish with surface markings eliminated and edges squared.

D. Cure SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform special inspection and prepare reports for fireproofing.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.

C. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of fireproofing shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.

1. Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq. in. sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches per ASTM E 605.

2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605.

3. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."



4. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each 10,000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736.

a. Field test fireproofing that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fireproofing material.

b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving fireproofing are primed or otherwise painted for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance criteria, but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736.

5. If testing finds applications of fireproofing are not in compliance with requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance.

D. Remove and replace applications of fireproofing that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.

E. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above.

3.6 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect fireproofing, according to recommendations of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage or deterioration at time of Final Acceptance.

C. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.



PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items:

1. Floors. 2. Roofs. 3. Walls and partitions.


1. Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction and in smoke barriers.


A. General: For the following constructions, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated.

1. Fire-resistance-rated load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings.

2. Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings.

3. Fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies. 4. Fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies. 5. Smoke barriers.

B. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:

1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 2. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings.



4. Penetrating items larger than 4-inch- diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall cross-sectional area.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.

2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

E. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.


A. Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

2. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer.

a. Engineer shall be legally qualified to practice in the state in which the project is located.


A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.




A. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems from a single manufacturer.

B. Installer's Qualifications: An experienced installer who is qualified by having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Firm shall hold current certification by third party attesting to its ability to select and install firestopping in accordance with performance requirements, have established management system for firestopping and employ trained supervisor (DRI) to maintain oversight of firestopping installation.

1. Certification for firestopping firms: Firm shall be certified by one of the following:

a. Factory Mutual Global: FM Standard 4991. b. Hilti Accredited Firestop Contractor. c. UL Qualified Firestop Contractor.

2. Qualification for Superintendent: Superintendent shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in firestopping.

3. Qualification for Firestop Installer: Trained individual in accordance with requirements of certification of firm.

a. Firestop Installers Training (FIT) Level 1 by Specified Technologies, Inc. b. Certified 3M Trained by 3M Fire Protection Products. c. Hilti Basic Firestop Training d. Similar training by manufacturers listed in Part 2.

4. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its through-penetration firestop system products to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:

1) UL in "Fire Resistance Directory."

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1.

1. Before installation of fire-resistance-rated assemblies and penetrating items, review through-penetration firestop system and examine procedures for ensuring quality of installed systems. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with through-penetration firestop system to attend, including the following:



a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for through-penetration firestop system. c. Through-penetration firestop system Manufacturer’s service representative. d. Through-penetration firestop system Installer. e. Fire- resistance-rated masonry Installer. f. Fire- resistance-rated gypsum board assembly Installer. g. Mechanical piping Installer. h. HVAC ductwork Installer. i. Electrical wireway Installer.

2. Review inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, through-penetration firestop system installation, and coordination of penetrating item configurations with available rated through-penetration firestop system assemblies.


A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.

C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.

D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. 2. Specified Technologies Inc. 3. 3M Fire Protection Products. 4. Tremco.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2.3 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier walls, and fire partitions. 2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

B. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

C. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

D. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars.



5. Steel sleeves.

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.



B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestop systems in accordance with ASTM E 2174 and to prepare test reports.

1. Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected through-penetration firestop systems comply with or deviate from requirements.

B. Compliance Inspections: One week prior to inspections by authorities having jurisdiction, Manufacturer's Representative shall perform compliance inspection with General Contractor's designated representative present. Reports shall be provided to General Contractor, with a copy to the Owner, Architect, and Firestopping Installer.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued.

D. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Penetration Identification: Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words: "Warning--Through-Penetration Firestop System--Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting

agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.



B. Wall Identification: Refer to Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for identification of fire-rated walls and smoke barriers.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements.



FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 1

SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following:

1. Floor-to-floor joints. 2. Floor-to-wall joints. 3. Head-of-wall joints. 4. Wall-to-wall joints. 5. Joints in smoke barriers.


1. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for closed-cell spray polyurethane foam insulation used as head-of-wall sealant for non-rated walls.

2. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestop Systems" for systems installed in openings in walls and floors with and without penetrating items.

3. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive joint sealants.


A. General: For joints in the following constructions, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed:

1. Fire-resistance-rated load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings.

2. Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings.

3. Fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies. 4. Smoke barriers.

B. Fire Resistance of Joint Systems: Assembly ratings and movement capabilities indicated, but with assembly ratings not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions in which joints are located, as determined by UL 2079.

1. Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time test.

C. Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: Integrity and insulation ratings indicated as determined by UL 2079.





B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show relationships to adjoining construction. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of fire-resistive joint system, signed by product manufacturer.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fire-resistive joint system.


A. Installer Qualifications: Comply with requirements of Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems for each kind of joint and construction condition indicated through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per UL 2079. Perimeter fire-containment systems are identical to those tested per both UBC Standard 26-9 and UL 2079. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

D. Preinstallation Conference: Refer to requirements of Section 078413 "Penetration Firestop Systems."


A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.



B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.

D. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. 2. Specified Technologies Inc. 3. 3M Fire Protection Products. 4. Tremco.

2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated.



2.3 PERIMETER FIRE-CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS

A. Where UL-classified perimeter fire-containment systems are indicated, they refer to alphanumeric designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHDG.

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:

1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor or floor/ceiling assemblies and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction they will join.

2.4 HEAD OF WALL SEALING

A. Head of Wall Sealing: Comply with requirements of UL HW-D-0042 or equivalent design.

1. Contractor's Option: Spray or sealant products may be used.

a. 3M; FireDam Spray or FD 150+ Sealant b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe 3000 Spray or FS 900 Sealant c. Hilti; CP672 Firestop Spray or CP 606 Sealant

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials.

2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to



remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.

C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels or self-adhesive vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect fire-resistive joint systems and to prepare inspection reports.

1. Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected fire-resistive joint systems comply with or deviate from requirements.

B. Compliance Inspections: One week prior to inspections by authorities having jurisdiction, Manufacturer's Representative shall perform compliance inspection with General Contractor's designated representative present. Reports shall be provided to General Contractor, with a copy to the Owner, Architect, and Firestopping Installer.

C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and inspecting agency has approved installed fire-resistive joint systems.



D. If deficiencies are found, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Latex joint sealants. 3. Acoustical joint sealants.


1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.

2. Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated construction.

3. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 4. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. 5. Section 095113 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with

acoustical sealant.


A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data

that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.



B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.

B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

C. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant in contact with air barrier, from air barrier manufacturer indicating sealant is compatible with air barrier.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

E. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

F. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.



D. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.


B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Verify available warranties and warranty periods with manufacturers listed in Part 2

articles. 2. Warranty Period for silicone sealants: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.



B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

E. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant ES-1: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation b. Momentive (formerly GE) c. Pecora Corporation d. Tremco Incorporated e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division

B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant ES-2: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation b. Momentive (formerly GE) c. Pecora Corporation d. Tremco Incorporated

C. Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant ES-3: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 100/50, for Use T.


a. Dow Corning Corporation b. Pecora Corporation c. Tremco Incorporated



D. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing or Acid Curing Silicone Joint Sealant ES-5: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.


a. BASF Building Systems b. Dow Corning Corporation c. Momentive (formerly GE) d. May National Associates, Inc. e. Pecora Corporation f. Tremco Incorporated

2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant LS-1: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Pecora Corporation d. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. e. Tremco Incorporated

2.4 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.


a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd. c. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Schul International, Inc. e. Willseal USA, LLC.

2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints AS-1: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.




a. Pecora Corporation b. United States Gypsum Co.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints AS-2: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.


a. Pecora Corporation b. Tremco

C. Acoustical Fire Rated Outlet Backer Pad:

1. Basis of Design: IsoBacker from Kinetics Noise Control.

2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per

Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a



continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

1. Where partition seals to a rough, textured or corrugated surface, provide closure strips to ensure complete contact with surface.

B. At sound-rated assemblies, wrap back and sides of outlet boxes with acoustical backer pads.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.



3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.8 EXTERIOR JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Calcium silicate masonry veneer, vertical construction joints:

1. ES-1 Single-component non-sag neutral-curing silicone sealant.

B. Cast-in-place concrete, vertical construction joints:


C. Cast-in-place concrete slabs, horizontal nontraffic and traffic isolation and contraction joints:

1. ES-3 Single-component pourable neutral-curing silicone sealant.

D. Unit masonry veneer, vertical control and expansion joints:


E. Unit masonry as backup, vertical control and expansion joints: Compatible with air barrier material. Provide one of the following:

1. ES-1 Single-component non-sag neutral-curing silicone sealant. 2. ES 7 One part, Moisture-curing polyurethane Sealant for Use NT.

F. Stucco joints:

1. ES-2 Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant.

G. Exterior vertical joints between different materials listed above:


H. Exterior perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows and louvers.


I. Exterior control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces.


J. Exterior control and expansion joints in horizontal traffic surfaces of unit pavers:




K. Other vertical or horizontal non-traffic joints:


L. Other exterior horizontal traffic joints:


3.9 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.


B. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry walls and partitions:


C. Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings.


D. Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

1. ES-5 Single-component mildew-resistant neutral -curing silicone sealant.

E. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances.

1. LS-1 Latex sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Paintable white.

F. Other non-dynamic interior joints including between interior wall surfaces and casework.

1. LS-1 Latex sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: Clear.

G. Acoustical interior joints for exposed joints.

1. AS-1 Latex sealant.

H. Acoustical interior joints for concealed joints.

1. AS-2 Latex sealant.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.


1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction.

2. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for penetration and barrier flashings required at exterior openings.

3. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 4. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass installed in doors and frames. 5. Sections 099113 "Exterior Painting" and 099123 "Interior Painting" for field painting

hollow metal doors and frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.



C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252.

C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.

D. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.



1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. D & D Specialties, Inc. 5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company 7. Habersham Metal Products Company 8. Mesker Door Inc. 9. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 10. Republic Doors and Frames 11. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.



H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with

thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

1) Locations: Exterior doors.

c. Performance Requirement: Exterior doors shall have a minimum U-Factor of 0.5.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 4. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch radius. 5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or

channels of same material as face sheets. 6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors

and Frames."

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless), unless noted otherwise.

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless), typical, unless noted otherwise.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.



E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch thick steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

3. Post-Installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.



B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose/Removable Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

2.7 LOUVERS

A. Provide louvers for doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch thick steel frame.

1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades.

2. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Louvers constructed with movable blades closed by actuating fusible link, and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type and fire-resistance rating indicated by same testing and inspecting agency that established fire-resistance rating of door assembly.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch-wide steel.

C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by

NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.



3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in

metal-stud partitions.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top

and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door

hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate door undercut with specified threshold to meet accessibility requirements and

provide positive seal to the threshold.



5. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections.

G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and

type of installation indicated.

2.10 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.



2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take

precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces.

6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.



7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.



ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1

SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.


1. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for roof hatches.



1. Include construction details materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.

C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish.

D. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate on plans and in the schedule specified in "Action Submittals" Article.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS


1. Acudor Products, Inc. 2. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. 3. Karp Associates, Inc. 4. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 5. Maxam Metal Products Limited.



6. MIFAB, Inc. 7. Milcor Inc. 8. Nystrom, Inc. 9. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges: AD-1 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with gypsum

board beads for concealed flange installation. 2. Locations: Ceilings and Walls in toilet rooms. 3. Door Size: As shown on Drawings. 4. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch, 16 gage.

a. Finish: Factory prime. 5. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door. 6. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 7. Hardware: Latch.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.

D. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.

1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely attached to perimeter of frames.

2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.



D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.

E. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

F. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

G. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

H. Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:

1. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for punched openings. 3. Manual-swing entrance doors and door frame units.




2. Review and discuss the finishing of aluminum windows that is required to be coordinated with the finishing of other aluminum work for finish matching.

3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchorage, flashing, sealing perimeters, and protecting finishes.

4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope.

5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Show sill pan/sill subframe/sill receptor. c. Anchorage. d. Expansion provisions.



e. Glazing. f. Flashing and drainage.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.

E. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

1. Submit schedule for review and approval by Owner.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 2. Detail anchorage system to substrate. 3. Include design calculations.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed entrance and storefront.

C. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.


E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.




A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Aluminum-framed entrance and storefront work shall be directly sub-contracted by the General Contractor to a qualified installer who specializes in the installation of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, utilizing their own forces for installation, and has an on-going business relationship with one of the specified manufacturers, whose product is to be supplied. Brokering or sub-subcontracting of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront work is unacceptable and will not be allowed.

B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC 17025.

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Anodized Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Fluoropolymer Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial

Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.

B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units.

C. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch.

E. Structural-Test Performance, for exterior systems: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

F. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance, for exterior systems: Provide aluminum-framed systems that pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to



ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996. Test glazed doors with proposed hardware installed and in same swing direction as shown on Drawings.

1. Large-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located between 30 feet and 60

feet of grade.

G. Air Infiltration, for exterior systems: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure for Exterior Systems: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 12 lbf/sq. ft.

1. Entrance Units: When closed and locked, shall not evidence water penetration at 16.5 psf. 2. Accessible Entrance Units: When closed and locked, shall not evidence water penetration

at 10.5 psf.

I. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure for Exterior Systems: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 12 lbf/sq. ft.

1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes.

J. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


K. Energy Performance, for exterior systems: Certify and label energy performance as indicated on Drawings and as follows: 1. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified

condensation resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according to NFRC 500.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


1. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company; IR500UT (Basis of Design) 2. EFCO Corporation 3. Oldcastle Building Envelope (formerly Vistawall) 4. YKK AP America Inc.



2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Front, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 4. Framing Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Finish: Clear anodic finish and fluoropolymer finish where indicated on Drawings.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Materials:

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 2-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.188-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

a. Thermal Construction for Exterior Doors: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width. 3. Accessible Entrances: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above

floor or ground plane. 4. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed

gaskets.



a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Except for items specified in this Article, entrance door hardware to be furnished under Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

1. All hardware preparation and installation to be performed as Work of this Section.

B. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC.

2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.

2.6 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

E. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type and as follows:

1. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by weatherseal-sealant and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing

system.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.



C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

E. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture

migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for

spandrel glazing or metal panels. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Sill Pan: Extruded aluminum, factory fabricated to provide sealed end dams, finished to match storefront; designed to direct water away from building when installed horizontally at sill. Provide high performance sill flashing with high back leg with two weep holes at each glass lite.

1. PVC is not acceptable.

F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

G. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.



H. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

B. High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Provide fasteners at spacing as recommended by manufacturer. 7. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.



2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install high performance sill flashing pan in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Apply sealant to back leg of sill pan and fasten sill flashing pan in rough opening. Apply watertight sealant over fastener heads.

D. Install storefront framing in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Do not penetrate sill flashing with fasteners. Install weatherseal as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. Do not block vents.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

H. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.


A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances:

1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.


A. Contractor/Installer Testing: Contractor/Installer shall be prepared to provide the following minimum testing as part of the Work.

1. Testing shall be in compliance with AAMA 501.2. Testing shall be performed at approximately 10 percent and 50 percent completion. A minimum of 2 test areas to be tested at each phase. Additional testing may be required if installation crew changes of if



construction is suspended and resumed after an extended period of time. Coordinate with Architect’s representative for areas to be tested, testing times, and representative’s availability to monitor tests.

B. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections.

C. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements.

1. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft., of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure difference specified for laboratory testing under Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., and shall not evidence water penetration.

D. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements.

E. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

G. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Entrance Door Hardware:

1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.

2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.



ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1

SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations.




2. Review and discuss the finishing of aluminum windows that is required to be coordinated with the finishing of other aluminum work for color and finish matching.

3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchorage, flashing, sealing perimeters, and protecting finishes.

4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope.

5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum windows.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, accessories, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inchesin size.

D. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.




A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each type of aluminum window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Certification of Fenestration Rating: Provide NFRC certified products, signed and dated certification from manufacturer, attesting to the u-factor, solar heat gain coefficient, and air leakage rates for each fenestration system to be used in the Project.


E. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports, and calculations.

B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, condensation, and

air infiltration. c. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. d. Failure of insulating glass.

2. Warranty Period:

a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Aluminum Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. All Seasons Window & Door Mfg., Inc.; All Seasons Commercial Division, Inc. 2. EFCO Corporation; a Pella company. 3. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 4. Peerless Products Inc. 5. TRACO. 6. Wausau Window and Wall Systems. 7. Winco. 8. YKK AP America Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

1. Window Certification: AMMA certified with label attached to each window.

B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:

1. Minimum Performance Class: CW. 2. Minimum Performance Grade: 50.

C. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.50 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F

D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.22.

E. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45.

F. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg Fmaterial surfaces.



G. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Capable of resisting impact from windborne debris based on testing glazed windows identical to those specified, according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

A. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings: 1. Fixed.

B. Frames: Aluminum extrusions complying with AAMA/ WDMA/ CSA 101/ I.S.2/ A440.

1. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.

C. Glass: Low-e coated, insulating laminated glass, as specified in Section 088000 – Glazing.

D. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.

E. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, anchors, and other components.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Sill Pan: Aluminum, factory fabricated to provide field-folded, sealed and riveted end dams, finished to match windows; designed to direct water away from building when installed horizontally at sill.

B. Low-pressure, expanding polyurethane foam insulation: AAMA 812-04.

1. Product: Dow “Great Stuff Pro Window and Door.”

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.

B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.

C. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.

D. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.




A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. High-Performance Organic Finish (Two-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.

C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.

C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.

D. Set sill members in watertight sill flashing pan. Provide 3/4 by 1/8-inch angle on inside face of frame; attach to sill prior to installation of pan. Attach sill members to vertical leg of angle only if required by manufacturer.

E. Penetrate bottom of flashing pan only as required to meet performance requirements and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. Do not apply sealant between flashing pan and bottom of frame.

F. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

G. Fill gap between rough opening and window frame with expanding polyurethane foam according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.

B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

C. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.



DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work under this section includes furnishing and the installation of finish and security hardware specified herein and noted on drawings for a complete and operational system, including any electrified door hardware components including finish and security hardware and auto operators for entrance doors.

Items include, but are not limited to: 1. Hinges/Continuous Hinges 2. Locksets and Cylinders 3. Push Plates - Pulls 4. Closers/ADA Operators 5. Kick, Mop and Protection Plates 6. Stops, Wall Bumpers, Overhead Controls 7. Thresholds, Gasketing and Door Bottoms 8. Silencers 9. Miscellaneous Trim and Accessories

B. RELATED SECTIONS:

1. Division 06 – Carpentry 2. Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors and Frames 3. Section 08 14 00 – Wood Doors 4. Section 08 41 00 – Entrances and Storefronts

C. Alternates

1. Refer to Division 01 in the project manual for project alternates.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. The following references are used in this section.

1. NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors, 2007. 2. Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware, DHI, 1984. 3. ANSI / BHMA A156.18, Materials and Finishes, 2006.

1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide items, articles, materials, operations and methods listed, mentioned or scheduled herein or on drawings, in quantities as required to complete project. Provide hardware that functions properly. Prior to furnishing hardware, advise Architect of items that will not operate properly, are improper for conditions, or will not remain permanently anchored.

B. DESCRIPTION OF WORK

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Hardware Schedule: Submit 5 copies of hardware schedule in vertical format as illustrated by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Schedules which do not comply will be returned for correction before checking.

B. Hardware schedule shall clearly indicate architect's hardware group and manufacturer of each item proposed.



C. The schedule shall be reviewed prior to submission by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), who shall affix his or her seal attesting to the completeness and correctness of the schedule.

1. Provide 2 copies of illustrations from manufacturer’s catalogs and data in brochure form. 2. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to details and surrounding

conditions. Indicate unsuitable or incompatible items and proposed substitutions in hardware schedule.

3. Provide listing of manufacturer's template numbers for each item of hardware in hardware schedule.

4. Furnish other Contractors and Subcontractors concerned with copies of final approved hardware schedule. Submit necessary templates and schedules as soon as possible to hollow metal, wood door, and aluminum door fabricators in accordance with schedule they require for fabrication.

5. Samples: Lever design or finish sample: Provide 3 samples if requested by architect.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Provide complete and detailed system operation and elevation diagrams specially developed for each opening requiring electrified hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold-opens or door position switches are specified. Provide these diagrams with hardware schedule submittal for approval. Provide detailed wiring diagrams with hardware delivery to jobsite.

E. Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturer's written installation and adjustment instructions for finish hardware. Send installation instructions to site with hardware.

F. Templates: Submit templates and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" to door and frame supplier and others as applicable to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts and reinforcing.

G. Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with Section 01700 including specific requirements indicated below.

1. Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following: 2. Complete information in care, maintenance, and adjustment, and data on repair and

replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. 3. Catalog pages for each product. 4. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. 5. Parts list for each product. 6. Copy of final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect "As installed". 7. Copy of final keying schedule. 8. As installed "Wiring Diagrams" for each opening connected to power, both low voltage and

110 volts. 9. One complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware,

including changing of cylinders.


A. General Contractor’s Investigation: Prior to Contract Execution, the General Contractor shall have thoroughly investigated the entities that will be performing work or supplying materials, products, equipment, or systems for this project, to ensure that they comply with all of the qualifications and requirements mentioned or implied in the Contract Documents. If it is later determined that any of the previously mentioned entities do not comply with the qualifications and requirements specified in the Contract Documents, the General Contractor will be required to replace that entity with a qualified entity at no increase in Contract Sum or Contract Time.



B. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (ie. latch and locksets, hinges, closers) from single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.

C. Qualifications of the Hardware Supplier: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware and installation in the Project’s vicinity for a period of not less than 4 years. The supplier shall be, or shall employ, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about the Project’s hardware requirements, to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor. An Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) shall prepare all hardware and access control schedules. This Supplier shall be responsible for proper coordination of all finish hardware items and access control items with related sections to insure compatibility of products.

1. Hardware supplier must be an authorized, direct factory distributor of all door hardware products specified herein to insure compliance and service of these products.

2. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.

D. Qualifications of Installer: The hardware installer shall have documented experience in the installation of hardware of similar quantities and types as required for this project. The installer’s qualifications shall be submitted to the architect, in writing, for approval by the architect before any work shall commence.

E. Fire-Rated Openings: Furnish door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Furnish only items, of door hardware, that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, ITS-WH, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction, for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, in compliance with the requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S Label requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with door and frame manufacturers to ensure that total door opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors (with supplementary marking on doors’ UL or FM labels including “Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware”) provide UL/WHI or FM label on exit devices indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”.

F. Substitutions: All substitution requests are required to be submitted prior to the bid date and complying with the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 01, General Requirements. Approval of submitted products is at the discretion of the architect and his hardware consultant.

G. At the Project’s Completion, the Owner’s Representative shall accompany the Architect and General Contractor during the Door Hardware and Access Control Items punch list phase of the project close-out, insuring the Owner’s Representative is familiar with all applications and systems, as installed. Refer to additional requirements under 3.0 EXECUTION.



H. Pre-Installation Meeting: Prior to door hardware installation, the General Contractor / Construction Manager shall request a hardware installation meeting to be held at the project location. This meeting shall convene prior to the hardware’s installation. The types of hardware this meeting shall include are: locksets, exit devices, and door closers. The manufacturer’s representatives of the above listed products, in conjunction with the hardware supplier for this project, shall conduct the installation training. All hardware installers shall be required to attend this meeting to receive certificate of authorized training. This meeting shall serve as door openings coordination and review of all shop drawings from related trades prior to the hardware installation. The Hardware Supplier shall include any related meeting costs in their proposal.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

B. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of the supplier. As material is received by the

hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set numbers to match the set numbers of the approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in the same container.

C. The door hardware supplier shall deliver all individually packaged hardware items in a timely

fashion to the place of installation (Shop or Project Site); direct factory shipments are not acceptable unless agreed upon beforehand. Hardware supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor.

D. The General Contractor, door hardware supplier, access control supplier, and installers shall

count, coordinate, and store all door hardware and access control items herein, verifying complete counts of all items scheduled and furnished. The contractor must report all shortages (discrepancies with shipping documents) within five (5) working days. The manufacturers’ and Owner’s representatives will inspect the installation of the door hardware and access control items during that phase of construction. Any deficiencies in installation of all materials included herein shall be corrected before installation continues.

E. The General Contractor shall provide a secure lock-up for the door hardware and security

equipment delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of the hardware items that are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. All materials must be warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance of this project, unless otherwise noted. Any evidence of misuse or abuse voids all warranties. These warranties shall be each manufacturers’ standard written warranty.

1. Warranty to begin at substantial completion.

B. Special Warranties:

1. Continuous Geared Hinges: Life of the Door Opening. 2. Mortise Latchsets and Locksets: Three (3) Year Period. 3. Door Closers: Thirty (30) Year Period.



4. Saddle Thresholds, Bumper Thresholds, Door Sweeps, Self-Adhesive Gasketing, Perimeter Seals, Astragal Seals, Self-Adhesive Astragal Gasketing, Mullion Seals, Interlocking Seals, and Drip Strips: Five (5) Year Period.

C. Any manufacturer whose standard written warranty does not equal or exceed the requirements

listed above must provide a letter stating that they will extend their warranty to comply with the requirements of this specification.

D. All of the manufacturer’s fasteners and attachments supplied with each hardware item must be

installed to maintain the manufacturer’s fire listing and/or warranty.

E. Refer to Section 01 - Closeout Procedures for additional warranty requirements.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: General Contractor shall furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for the Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BUTTS AND HINGES

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

Ives Bommer Stanley 5BB1 BB5000 FBB179 5BB1 BB5001 FBB191

B. Application:

1. Provide NRP (non-removable pins) at out-swinging lockable doors.

C. Quantity:

1. Two hinges per leaf for openings through 60 inches high. 2. One additional hinge per leaf for each additional 30 inches in height or fraction thereof. 3. Four hinges for Dutch doors up to 90 inches in height.

2.2 CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGES

A. Acceptable manufacturers:

Ives Stanley Select 224HD 662HD SL24HD

B. Provide electric power transfer (EPT) cutouts, or electric through-wire options as specified in hardware groups.

2.3 LOCKSETS – MORTISE

A. Acceptable Manufacturer and Series:

Schlage Corbin Best



L9000 x 17A ML2000 x Princeton 45H x 14H

B. Provide lock functions specified in Hardware Groups, with following provisions:

1. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 2. Locksets shall be manufactured from heavy gauge steel, 1/8” minimum lock case thickness,

containing components of steel with a Zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. 3. Locksets are to have a standard 2 3/4” backset with a full 3/4” throw. Deadbolt shall be a full

1” throw, constructed of stainless steel. 4. Lock shall be easily handed without opening the lock case. 5. Lock trim shall be through-bolted to door to assure correct alignment a proper operation. 6. Furnish “Knurled” or “Tactile” outside levers as indicated in the door Hardware Sets.

“Abrasive” outside levers shall not be acceptable.

2.4 ALUMINUM DOOR DEADLOCKS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer and Series:

Adams Rite MS1850S 4900

B. Provide deadlocks and deadlatches for aluminum doors as specified in hardware groups.

C. Provide mortise cylinders of proper length and with proper cam as specified in hardware groups.

D. Provide manufacturers standard strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.

2.5 KEYING

A. Master key or Grand master key cylinders and key in groups, unless otherwise specified. Factory masterkey with manufacturer retaining permanent keying records.

B. Provide 6 masterkeys for each masterkey set. Provide 3 change keys for each lock. Provide 2 control keys for core removal. Stamp keys "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

C. Submit proposed keying schedule to Architect. If requested, meet with Owner and Architect to review schedule.

D. Provide removable core cylinders, with patented key control, for each lock with temporary keyed brass construction cores. Permanent cores shall be installed upon completion of the project.

2.6 DOOR TRIM

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types:

Ives Trimco Burns 8200 1001-9 56 8303 1018-3B 5426C 9100 1741 422 8190 1191-3 29C 8103-0 1195-2 26C 8102-8 1194-2 25B

B. Push Plates:



1. Ives type 8200 6 inches by 16 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where width of door stile prevents use of 6 inch wide plate, provide push plate one inch less

than width of stile but not less than 4 inches wide.

C. Pull Plates:

1. Ives type 8303 4 inches by 16 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Push Bars:

1. Ives type 9100, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Pulls:

1. Ives Series 8190, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where required, mount back to back with push bars.

F. Kick Plates and Armor Plates: Ives 8400 Series, minimum of 0.050 inch thick, beveled 4 edges.

1. At single doors provide width two inches less than door width on stop side and one inch less than door width on pull side.

2. At pairs of doors provide width one inch less than door width on both sides. 3. Height of 10 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide plates with countersunk screw holes.

2.7 DOOR CLOSERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types of Exposed Closers:

LCN Sargent Corbin 4011 / 4111 281 / 281-P10 DC8200 / DC8210 x A3

B. Closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron cylinder.

C. Provide non-sized closers, continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force to meet opening force requirements of ANSI A117.1

D. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, swing speed, and back check.

E. Provide closers with solid forged steel main arms (and forearms for parallel arm closers) and where specified to have a cast-in solid stop on the closer shoe (“CUSH”). Parallel arm mounted closers shall have “EDA” type arms or, where specified, “CUSH” or “SCUSH” type arms.

F. Surface closers shall be certified to exceed ten million full load cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory.

G. Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details.

H. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors.

I. Provide back-check for closers.

J. Provide hold-open arms where indicated.

K. Provide closers for doors as noted in Hardware Groups and, in addition, provide closers for labeled doors whether or not specifically noted in group.

L. Provide closers meeting the requirements of UBC 7-2, 1997 and UL 10C positive pressure tests.



M. Pressure relief valves (PRV’s) shall not be permitted.

2.8 WALL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types:

Ives Trimco Door Controls WS406/407CVX

1270WXCP 3211

WS406/407CCV 1270WVP 3211T

B. Provide WS406/407CCV Series wall stop for each door leaf unless otherwise specified, or where conditions require the use of an overhead stop.

C. Floor or base stops shall be used only where definitely specified or absolutely unavoidable.

2.9 THRESHOLDS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product:

National Guard

Reese Zero

425E S425A 8655A

B. Where thresholds are specified in hardware groups, provide 425E thresholds unless detailed otherwise.

C. Refer to drawings for special details. Provide accessories, shims and fasteners.

D. Where thresholds occur at openings with one or more mullions, they shall be cut for the mullions and extended continuously for the entire opening.

2.10 WEATHERSTRIPPING

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product:

National Guard Reese Zero Sweeps 201NA 323C 39A Jambs 700SA 755C 429A Rain Drips 16A R201C 142A

B. Where weatherstripping is specified in hardware groups, provide 700SA unless detailed otherwise.

C. Provide self-tapping fasteners for weatherstripping being applied to hollow metal frames.

D. Where sweeps are specified in hardware groups, provide 201NA unless detailed otherwise.

E. Where rain drips are specified in hardware groups, provide 16A x full frame width, unless detailed otherwise.



2.11 GASKETING

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

National Guard Reese Zero 5050 F-797B 188S

B. Where smoke gasket is specified in hardware groups, provide 188S, unless detailed otherwise.

C. Provide gaskets for 20-minute doors and doors designated for smoke and draft control.

D. Where frame applied intumescent seals are required by the manufacturer, provide gaskets that comply with UBC 7-2, 1997 and UL 10C positive pressure tests.

2.12 LATCH PROTECTORS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and types:

M.A.G. Ives Don-Jo 8851-S LG10 CLP-110-32D

B. Latch protectors shall be minimum 13 gauge stainless steel of the type required to work with the specified latch.

C. Latch protectors shall incorporate a security frame pin to prevent separation of the door and frame.

2.13 SILENCERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and types:

Ives Steelcraft Don-Jo SR64 Q146 1608

B. Provide grey rubber silencers featuring pneumatic design that, once installed, forms an air pocket to absorb shock and reduce noise of door closing.

C. Provide three (3) silencers per hollow metal strike jamb; two (2) per hollow metal double door head. Omit at doors scheduled to receive perimeter weatherstripping or smoke gasket.

D. Silencers shall meet ANSI/BHMA A156.16, L03011

2.14 KEY CABINET

A. Provide key cabinets by Lund Equipment, Telkee Incorporated, or Key Control.

B. Lund Deluxe wall type cabinet, Series 1200.

C. Provide cabinet with one hook for each lock or cylinder plus at least 50 percent extra hooks.

D. Provide each hook with one non-removable security key tag and one snap-on link duplicate key tag.

E. Provide tools, instruction sheets and accessories required to complete installation.



F. Owner will place keys in key cabinet and complete index cards furnished with key system.

2.15 KEY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE

A. Provide Sitemaster 200 key management software.

B. Software shall provide tracking, issuing, collecting and transferring information regarding keys, doors, and hardware.

C. Provide training for Owner’s personnel on the proper operation and application of the key management software.

2.16 FASTENERS

A. Including, but not limited to, wood or machine screws, bolts, bolts, nuts, anchors, etc. of proper type, material, and finish required for installation of hardware.

B. Use phillips head for exposed screws. Do not use aluminum screws to attach hardware.

C. Provide self-tapping (TEC) screws for attachment of sweeps and stop-applied weatherstripping only.

2.17 TYPICAL FINISHES AND MATERIALS

A. Finishes, unless otherwise specified:

1. Butts: Interior Doors and Inswinging Exterior Doors a. US26D (BHMA 652) on Steel

2. Continuous Hinges: a. US28 (BHMA 628) on Aluminum

3. Locks and Latches: a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze

4. Push Plates, Pulls and Push Bars: a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel

5. Kick Plates, Armor Plates, and Edge Guards: a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel

6. Closers: Surface mounted. a. Sprayed Aluminum Lacquer.

7. Latch Protectors: a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel

8. Miscellaneous Hardware: a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors, frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of finish hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and, except as otherwise indicated, by the Architect.



1. “Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” by the Door and Hardware Institute.

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.

C. Sets units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

D. Where scheduled, door pulls shall be through-bolted with bolt heads concealed behind push plates.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

F. Set thresholds, for exterior and interior doors, in a full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 - Joint Sealers.

G. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.

H. The hardware installer shall be responsible for installation of all mechanical and electromechanical hardware items contained within this specification, in accordance with the manufacturer’s technical installation guidance, and in addition to all applicable code requirements.


A. After installation has been completed, provide services of qualified hardware consultant to check Project to determine proper application of finish hardware according to schedule. Also check operation and adjustment of hardware items.

B. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.


A. At final completion, hardware shall be left clean and free from disfigurement. Make final adjustment to door closers and other items of hardware. Where hardware is found defective repair or replace or otherwise correct as directed.

B. Adjust door closers to meet opening force requirements of Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards.

C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of space or area, return to work during week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.

D. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes.

E. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.



3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide for proper protection of items of hardware until Owner accepts Project as complete.

3.6 HARDWARE GROUPS

A. The following schedule of hardware groups shall be considered a guide only, and the supplier is cautioned to refer to general conditions, special conditions, and the preamble to this section. It shall be the hardware supplier's responsibility to furnish all required hardware.

B. Refer to the door schedule for hardware group required at each door opening.

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01

FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): A1A A2A A3A A4A A5A A6A A6D B2A B2E B3A B4A B5A C2A C4A C5A C6A C7A C8A D1A D5A D6A D7A D8A PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 2 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH

BOLT FB458 626 IVE

1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA DEADBOLT MS1850S

X THUMB TURN 626 ADA

2 SET PUSH/PULL BAR 9190HD-10"-NO 630 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA THRESHOLD 8655A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 SET CYLINDER MORTISE CYLINDER 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME

MANUFACTURER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): A1B A2B A3B A4B A5B A6B B2B B3B B4B B5B C2B C4B C5B C6B C7B C8B C9B D1B D5B D6B D7B D8B PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 628 IVE



1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080T 17A 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH 1 EA LOCK GUARD LG10 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 EA HEAD SEAL 429A AL ZER 2 EA JAMB SEAL 429A AL ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 8655A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 EA DOOR VIEWER U696 626 IVE


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): A2C A3C A4C A5C A6C B2C B2D B3C B4C C4C C5C C6C C7C C8C C9C D5D D5C D6C D7C D7D D8C A1C D1C PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK L9040 17A L583-363 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE 1 EA COAT AND HAT

HOOK 582 626 IVE


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): A7A B10A C10A D9A PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080T 17A 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH 1 EA LOCK GUARD LG10 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 EA HEAD SEAL 429A AL ZER 2 EA JAMB SEAL 429A AL ZER



1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 8655A MSLA-10 AL ZER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): A1D B5C B5D C9A C2E D1D PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 1 EA DEADBOLT MS1850S 626 ADA 1 SET PUSH/PULL BAR 9190HD-10"-NO 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA THRESHOLD 8655A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 SET CYLINDER MORTISE CYLINDER 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME

MANUFACTURER


FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): D10A PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 2 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 628 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH

BOLT FB458 626 IVE

1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080T 17A 626 SCH 1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH 1 EA LOCK GUARD LG10 630 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 630 IVE 1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A AL ZER 1 EA HEAD SEAL 429A AL ZER 2 EA JAMB SEAL 429A AL ZER 1 EA ASTRAGAL 328AA AA ZER 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A AL ZER 1 EA THRESHOLD 8655A MSLA-10 AL ZER 1 SET CYLINDER MORTISE CYLINDER




FOR USE ON MARK/DOOR #(S): C2C C2D PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK L9040 17A L583-363 626 SCH 1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY 1 EA COAT AND HAT

HOOK 582 626 IVE

END OF SECTION

PDF created by SpeXtra Page 1

Catalog Cutsfor

Westside Shoppes at Horizon West

Sorted by DHI Sequence

Prepared BySEAN KING CSI, CDT

ALLEGION, PLC8610 AIR PARK WEST DRIVE

CHARLOTTE NCPhone 770-880-5039 Fax 704-549-8010

Created 9/30/2015

Project: Westside Shoppes at Horizon West

Control #: 200586 Print Date: Sep 30 2015 3:54PM EDT

Company: Allegion, PLC Version #: 2 Ver Date: Sep 30 2015 12:55PM EDT

Page 2 of 2

Catalog Cut Summary

Mfr Description Catalog Number Cut Page Number IVE CONT. HINGE 224HD IVE_0255~IVE_5005 IVE HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 IVE_0250 IVE MANUAL FLUSH

BOLTFB458 IVE_0097

IVE DUST PROOF STRIKE

DP2 IVE_0098

SCH PRIVACY LOCK L9040 17A L583-363

SCH_0011

SCH STOREROOM LOCK L9080T 17A SCH_0011 ADA DEADBOLT MS1850S ADA_SL01 SCH FSIC CORE 23-030 SCH_CYL_FSIC IVE LOCK GUARD LG10 IVE_0164 IVE PUSH/PULL BAR 9190HD-10"-NO IVE_0126~IVE_5004 GLY OH STOP 90S GLY_0003 LCN SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH LCN_4110 IVE KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW

B4EIVE_0223

IVE WALL STOP WS406/407CCV IVE_0141 ZER RAIN DRIP 142A ZER_0076 ZER HEAD SEAL 429A ZER_0076 ZER JAMB SEAL 429A ZER_0076 ZER ASTRAGAL 328AA ZER_0139 ZER DOOR SWEEP 39A ZER_0027 ZER THRESHOLD 8655A MSLA-10 ZER_0089 IVE COAT AND HAT

HOOK582 IVE_0199

IVE DOOR VIEWER U696 IVE_0168

USA 1 .877 .671 .7011 Canada 1 .905 .403 .1800 www .allegion .com/us

Continuous Hinges

BPulls &

PlatesA

23H

inges & Pivots

CFlush Bolts &

CoordinatorsD

Latches, Catches & Bolts

EStopsF

Exterior Hardw

areG

Miscellaneous H

ardware

A23

Electrical Cutouts

Ives Aluminum Geared Continuous Hinges are available with factory modified cutouts to accommodate most electrical frame to door requirements . Special templates are required .

When ordering indicate the following:1 . Opening size .2 . Handing . LH, RH, RHR or LHR .3 . Manufacturer and model number of the electrical product being used . Example; Von Duprin EPT2

Because clearances may vary between door and frame manufacturer, and locations can be influenced by the door hardware it is always recommend contacting Ives Customer Technical for specific template information .

For your general information below are standard locations for Von Duprin EPT2 or EPT10, and monitor switch .

224HD Full Mortise Aluminum Geared Continuous Hinge • Handing required when modified • DoorEdgeProtector • 48"MaximumDoorWidth • 1/16"DoorInset • Beveled or Square Edge Doors

For Doors Weighing up to 450 pounds without reinforcing, 600 pounds with reinforcing

Standard lengths 83", 85", 95", 120"Standard Mounting Hardware12-24 X 3/4" Steel Self Drilling, Self Tapping ScrewsOptional WD - Wood Screws or SEC - Security Fasteners Available

Finishes Clear (CL), Dark Bronze (DB)Custom Anodizing and Painting areavailable, consult factory.

EPT112HD112HD 224HD

“C EPT”L“C EPT”L

Top of hinge/door

Top of hinge/door

Top of hinge/door

224HD112HDTW

“C TW”L

112HD 224HD


Top of hinge/door

Top of hinge/door

Top of hinge/door

224HD112HDTW

“C TW”L

EPT224HD

112HD 224HD


Top of hinge/door

Top of hinge/door

Top of hinge/door

224HD112HDTW

“C TW”L

TW112HD

224HD

5/16" Clearance for Square Edge Door1/32" Clearance For Beveled Edge Door

From Top Edge of Door to Center Line of Cut-Out

Standard 112HD 224HD 112HD/224HDLength EPT EPT TW83" 30" 30" 41-1/2"85" 32" 32" 42-1/2"95" 42" 42" 57-3/4"120" 67" 67" 81-25/32"

TWP option centered in hinge.Note: See ordering guide in price book for proper placement.

Ives Architectural hardware productsA24

Continuous Hinges

BPu

lls &

Pla

tes

A24

Hin

ges

& P

ivot

sC

Flus

h Bo

lts &

Coo

rdin

ator

sD

Latc

hes,

Cat

ches

& B

olts

E Stop

sF

Exte

rior H

ardw

are

GM

isce

llane

ous H

ardw

are

General Information

Standard Lengths83", 85", 95", 120"Custom lengths are available up to 120", consult factory.

FinishesUS32D (630) Satin Stainless SteelUSP (600) Steel, Primed for Paint

Barrel TypeTwin Self Lubricated Nylon Bearings with Stainless Steel Pin .

Door Weight Each hinge can hold a door up to 600 lbs (Rivet nuts recommended) and a max door width of 4'0" .

ANSI Certified All Ives Pin and Barrel Hinges certified to ANSI 156 .26, Grade 1 .

UL Listed All Ives Steel and Stainless Steel Pin and Barrel Hinges are tested and approved UL 10C (3 hr) .

Field ModificationsAll Ives Pin and Barrel Continuous Hinges can be cut to length during installation . If more than 6" from bottom of hinge, additional modifications may be necessary .

Electrification OptionsOnly available for the Full Mortise Hinges

Electric Power Transfer (EPT) Electric power transfer provides a means of transferring power from the door frame to the edge of a swinging door . Ives Continuous Hinges provide cut outs to fit Von Duprin EPT-2, EPT-10 and PNT-1 devices . Consult factory for other EPT cut out options .

Electrical Through-Wire (TW) Provides electric power transfer from the frame to the door in order to supply power to an electrified mortise or cylindrical locks, exit devices with electric latch retraction, and/or electric strikes (pairs of doors) . Through-wire is rated for 3 .5 amp continuous and 16 amp pulse . Ives thru-wire are fully compatible with 4 wire and 8 wire installations .

Pin and Barrel Hinges

Ives Architectural hardware products

Architectural Hinges

BPulls &

PlatesA

7H

inges & Pivots

CFlush Bolts &

CoordinatorsD


EStopsF

Exterior Hardw

areG

Miscellaneous H

ardware

A7

Meets ANSI/BHMA A156 .1A8112 – SteelA5112 – Stainless SteelA2112 – Brass

5BB1 5 Knuckle, Ball Bearing Full Mortise Hinge • Forstandardweightdoors • Mediumfrequencyusage • 2ballbearing • Packedwithwoodandmetalscrews Options•NRP,Non-RemovablePin•SH,SecurityStud•HT,HospitalTip•RC,RoundCorners-1/4"or5/8"Radius•SEC,SecurityFastners-Pin-in-Socket

DimensionsSize (Inches) Size (mm) Gauge3 .5 x 3 .5 80 x 102 0 .1304 x 4 102 x 102 0 .1304 .5 x 4 114 x 102 0 .1344 .5 x 4 .5 114 x 114 0 .134

Size (Inches) Size (mm) Gauge5 x 4 .5 127 x 114 0 .1465 x 5 127 x 127 0 .146

Meets ANSI/BHMA A156 .1A8133 – SteelA5133 – Stainless SteelA2133 – Brass

5PB1 5 Knuckle, Plain Bearing Full Mortise Hinge • Forstandardweightdoors • Lowfrequencyusage • Packedwithwoodandmetalscrews Not for use with a door closer.

Options•NRP,Non-RemovablePin•SH,SecurityStud•HT,HospitalTip•RC,RoundCorners-1/4"or5/8"Radius•SEC,SecurityFastners-Pin-in-Socket

DimensionsSize (Inches) Size (mm) Gauge3 .5 x 3 .5 89 x 89 0 .1234 x 4 102 x 102 0 .1344 .5 x 4 114 x 102 0 .1344 .5 x 4 .5 114 x 114 0 .1345 x 4 .5 127 x 114 0 .134

Finishes brassIves Finish US3 US4 US10 US10B US10A US11 US15 US26 US26D

BHMA 605 606 612 613 614 616 619 625 626

Finishes steelIves Finish USP US3 US4 US10 US10B US10A US11 US15 US26 US26D

BHMA 600 632 633 639 640 641 643 646 651 652

Finishes stainless steelIves Finish US32 US32D

BHMA 629 630

Ives Architectural hardware productsC10

Manual Flush Bolts – Metal Doors

BPu

lls &

Pla

tes

AH

inge

s &

Piv

ots

C10

Flus

h Bo

lts &

Coo

rdin

ator

sD

Latc

hes,

Cat

ches

& B

olts

E Stop

sF

Exte

rior H

ardw

are

GM

isce

llane

ous H

ardw

are

FB458 Top or Bottom Bolts • Whentheactivedoorisopened,thelevercanbemovedtothe‘up’ position, retracting the bolt and allowing the inactive leaf to be opened . When the inactive leaf is closed, the lever can be moved to the ‘down’ position, projecting the bolt into the strike and securely locking the inactive leaf . • Simplifiedinstallationinmetalframes.Roundboltheadrequiresonly

a punched hole . Use of strike optional . Special design of guide and flat sided bolt tip to prevent bolt rotation .

• Non-handed. • Bolttipis1/2"diameter. • Boltthrowis3/4"witha7/8"verticaladjustment. • Boltbacksetis3/4" • StandardRodLengthis12",whichismeasuredfromthecenter

of the flush bolt body to the bolt tip . Optional Rod Lengths available - 6", 9", 18" and 24" for fire rated Doors . Optional Rod lengths available - 6", 9", 18", 24", 30", 36" and 48" for non-fire rated doors .

DP1 or DP2 optional dust proof strike available, see page C11.

Dimensions

Body Size: 1" Wide x 6-3/4" Long x 1-1/8" Deep

Guide Size: 1" Wide x 2" Long x 5/64" Thick

Strike Size: 15/16" Wide x 2-1/4" Long x 5/64" Thick

Meets ANSI/BHMA A156 .16, L04251 .

UL Listed 90 Minute Fire Doors 8'0" x 10'0"

FinishesIves Number US3 US4 US5 US10 US10B US15 US26 US26D

BHMA 605 606 609 612 613 619 625 626

Ives Architectural hardware productsC11

Dust Proof Strikes

BPulls &

PlatesA

Hinges &

PivotsC

11Flush Bolts &

CoordinatorsD


EStopsF

Exterior Hardw

areG

Miscellaneous H

ardware

DP1DP2 Dust Proof Strikes • Designedforusewiththebottomboltofallflushbolts. • Spring-loadedplungerreturnstofloororthresholdlevelanytime flush bolt is retracted, eliminating need to clean standard floor strikes . • Strikeholeis3/4"Diameterand1-1/8"Deep

DimensionsDP1 Face Plate: 1-7/16" Diameter DP2 Face Plate: 1-5/8" W x 3-1/2" L x 1/8" Thick Body: 1-3/16" Diameter x 1-7/8" Deep

DP1

DP2

Meets Meets ANSI/BHMA 156 .16, L14011 .

FinishesIves Number US3 US4 US10 US10B US26 US26D

BHMA 605 606 612 613 625 626

Nothingistougher

At Schlage we know that every product you specify has to stand up to

constant use and abuse. Your building’s locking systems face an additional

challenge – keeping people and other assets safe while delivering constant,

reliable performance. Schlage L Series Extra Heavy Duty Mortise Locks are

built to withstand the rigors of daily use without fail.

L Series

Wedon’tcompromiseonsecurity

The safety and security of your clients’ buildings is something we take very

seriously. That’s why every Schlage lock and deadbolt undergoes intensive

testing to determine its ANSI grade level:

• Cycle tests • Resistance tests

• Door impact tests • Warped door tests

• Bolt strength tests

We pay attention to these details so you can focus on creating a functional

and aesthetically pleasing environment for your clients. In fact, every one of

our L Series locks meets ANSI Grade 1 standards for safety.

Schlage•LSeries•7

7

4

8

1110

1

15

12

9

2

Vandlgard®

The L Series Vandlgard is ideal for areas subject to abuse or

anywhere vandalism is likely to be present. Vandlgard

prevents damage to internal lock components caused by

excessive force from kicking, hitting or standing on the lever

to gain access.

It’s easy to retrofit standard L Series locks with Vandlgard

using the Vandlgard Retrofit Kit and an instructional DVD

that shows installation on existing hardware.

5

8 • Schlage • LSeries

SchlageL9000Series

Our L9000 Series locks are ideal for use in schools,

hospitals and factories, where the finest hardware

must also deliver consistent, dependable operation

and stand up to constant use and abuse.

Therightlockforeveryapplication

SchlageL400Series

Our L400 Series locks are designed for use as

primary locks where no latching is required, such

as restrooms and small doors to utility spaces.

They also offer optimum security when used as

auxiliary locks in other applications.

1. High-strength steel alloy cylinder retainer

2. Armored front in brass, bronze or stainless

steel; adjustable for door bevel

3. 1" (25 mm) stainless steel throw deadbolt

4. Deeper retainer groove in cylinder shell

increases security against wrenching and

pullout; all cylinders backward compatible

5. 6-pin Everest® cylinder with patented keys

standard

6. Steel case and parts are corrosion resistant

Strength and durability

1. Fully wrapped heavy-gauge steel case protects against

door edge attacks

2. All-metal zinc dichromate-plated working parts

3. Inside lock case protects electronic components

4. Two-piece anti-friction tongue reduces wear and tear

5. Outside and inside trim thru-bolted together and

through the door

Security built in

6. Break-away spindle prevents unsecured failures

and provides easy spindle replacement

7. Hub blocking plate protects lock against spindle

manipulation

8. Spring-loaded fusible link provides fail secure

mode in case of fire

9. Inside lever applied by screwless shank mounting – no

exposed trim mount screws

Adaptable to your application

10. Universal lock case – ten functions in one case

11. Floating mounting tabs automatically adjust to

fit a beveled door edge

12. Field-reversible handing without opening lock case

13. External spring cages allow for simple trim retrofit

14. Locking thumbturn on the inside of door visually

shows when the door is locked and unlocked

15. Lever rotation in both directions (up and down)

for ease of use

16. Independent lever rotation

3

2

4

5

1

6


TheMCollectionArangeofoptions.Asinglestandardofquality.

Introducing the M Collection, an entire lineup of decorative levers designed to maintain a custom

high-style look on doors throughout any building—from the main entrance to the supply closet.

The ability to suite M Collection levers across multiple platforms from Schlage and Von Duprin

means consistent style and functionality—along with unrivaled security.

The M Collection was designed to function as a visual extension of any interior, from

contemporary to classic.

M56 M57

M51 M52 M53

M81 M83 M82

M61

4.5"

3.2"

2.4"

4.6"

3"

2.1"

4.8"

0.4"

2.9"

4.5”

3"

2.2"

2.9"

2.15"

4.5"

4.8"

2.9"

0.4"

3.2"

2.6"

4.35"

4.5"

3.2"

2.1"

4.6"

2.9"

0.4"

10•Schlage • LSeries

Allleverdesignsshown (MCollectionandStandard)canbepairedwithanyofthefollowingcommercialgradedproductsforsuitingacrossanoffice,afloororanentirebuilding.

Schlage L Series mortise locks Grade 1

Schlage L Series locks have long been the industry standard for mortise locks, with a comprehensive offering of functions and options to support any opening need.

Schlage LT Series tubular locks Grade 2

The perfect compliment to the Schlage L Series or the Von Duprin exit devices, the LT Series tubular chassis is based on venerable L Series mortise lock and provides an alternative to lever suiting for interior doors.

Von Duprin 98/99 exit devicesGrade 1

Von Duprin created the first exit device in 1908, and continues to redefine the industry today with unsurpassed quality and industry-unique features such as concealed vertical cables. The 98/99 Series exit device is intended for standard-stile doors. For use with 996L trim only.

Von Duprin 33A/35A exit devicesGrade 1

Offering the same innovate features as the 98/99 Series, the 33A/35A Series of exit devices is intended for narrow-stile doors. For use with 360L trim only.

Von Duprin 94/95 exit devicesGrade 1

The 94/95 has the pushbar trim recessed into the door to minimize the external profile, allowing more room for people and equipment to pass through. For use with 940L trim only.

M55M54

M63

M84

M62

M85

4.35"

2.75"

2.14"

4.5"

2.7"

1.9"

5.1"

3"

0.4"

4.3"

3"

2.14"

4.5"

3.2"

2.1"

4.9"

3.3"

0.3"

Exitdevices

Locks

Finish options

Color Bright brass

Satin brass

Antique brass

Satin nickel

Bright chrome

Satin chrome

Bright stainless

steel

Satin stainless

steel

Aged bronze

ANSI/BHMA number

605 606 609 619 625 626/626AM 629 630/630AM 643

US number US3 US4 US5 US15 US26 US26D US32 US32D US11

AM = Antimicrobial. See pricebook for additional trim and finish availability. 33A, 95 & 99 devices not available in 619 & 630 finishes.

Images shown with Schlage L Mortise ‘A’ rose; additional rose and escutcheon designs available.


TheStandardCollectionBuiltonourtraditionofraisingindustrystandards.

Like the M Collection, these lever designs suite with exit devices and locks from our trusted

Schlage and Von Duprin brands. And, they are built to the same exacting standards.

Our Standard Collection levers offer a more traditional style that is appropriate for use in a

number of commercial applications.

1812

01 02 03

OmegaMerano Longitude

17

2.688"

2.031"

4.875"

.375"

5.063"

3.313"

2.813"

1.813"

4.75"

3.063"

2"

4.625"

2.563"

4.875"

.5"

4.75"

2.813"

.5"

.5"

3"

4.75"

4"

2"

3.125"

2.688"

2.063"

3.875"


07

2.875"

4.625"

1.969"

To learn more about suiting of Schlage and Von Duprin products with our decorative or standard levers contact your security consultant or visit allegion.com/us.

Accent

05 06

Latitude

St Annes

Asti

2.563"

4.75"

4.313"

2"

3.125"

2.5"

.5"

4.625"

2.875"

3.75"

2.281"

4.125"

2"

3.125"

4"

2"

2.625"

Finish options

Color Bright brass

Satin brass

Antique brass

Satin bronze

Oil rubbedBronze

Satin nickel

Bright chrome

Satin chrome

Bright stainless

steel

Satin stainless

steel

Aged bronze

ANSI/BHMA number

605 606 609 612 613 619 625 626/626AM 629 630/630AM 643

US number US3 US4 US5 US10 US10B US15 US26 US26D US32 US32D US11

AM = Antimicrobial. See pricebook for additional trim and finish availability. 33A, 95 & 99 devices not available in 619 & 630 finishes.


EscutcheonsandrosesChoose from three types of escutcheon and two rose sizes to add tough,

durable performance to your lockset.

Escutcheons

7/16"11mm

8"203mm

7/16"11mm

8"203mm

7/16"11mm

8"203mm

Roses

L Full faceSpecify by adding ‘L’ after lever design.

Material: Cold-forged brass, bronze or stainless steel

Finishes: 605, 606, 609, 612, 613, 619, 625, 626, 629, 630, 643e

Size: 8" x 1 3⁄4" x 7⁄16" (203 mm x 44 mm x 11 mm)

A Wrought rose2 1⁄8" (54 mm) diameterAvailable for use on L Series knob and lever designs. Specify by adding ‘A’ after lever design

Finishes: 605, 606, 609, 612, 613, 619, 625, 626, 629, 630, 643e

B Wrought rose2 9⁄16" (65 mm) diameterAvailable for use on L Series knob and lever designs. Specify by adding ‘B’ after lever design.

Finishes: 605, 606, 609, 612, 613, 619, 625, 626, 629, 630, 643e

C Wrought rose2 5⁄8" (66 mm) diameterAvailable for use on L Series knob and lever designs. Specify by adding ‘C’ after lever design.

Finishes: 605, 606, 609, 619, 625, 626, 629, 630, 643e

L ConcealedSpecify by adding ‘C’ suffix to function and by adding ‘L’ after lever design.

Material: Cold-forged brass, bronze or stainless steel

Finishes: 605, 606, 609, 612, 613, 619, 625, 626, 629, 630, 643e

Size: 8" x 1 3⁄4" x 7⁄16" (203 mm x 44 mm x 11 mm)

N EscutcheonSpecify by adding ‘N’ after lever design.

Material: Heavy wrought reinforced brass, bronze or stainless steel

Finishes: 605, 606, 609, 612, 613, 619, 625, 626, 629, 630, 643e

Size: 8" x 2 9⁄16" x 7⁄16" (203 mm x 65 mm x 11 mm)


ThumbturnsChoose from three variations of thumbturn locks that help you meet the

demands of specialized commercial projects.

Tactilewarning(knurling)

Schlage L Series commercial levers feature knurling only

on the outside lever unless otherwise specified.

This feature is available on the following lever models:

01, 02, 03, 05, 06, 07, 12, 17, 18, 41, 42 and 93. 03 Lever shown

Products featuring a knurled surface will be indicated by adding the prefix “8” to the lever number. For example, L9050P 803A/03A.

Hotel occupancy indicator 09-611For lock function L9486P, this unit can be used with A or B roses. Requires a 1 3⁄8" (35 mm) cylinder for 1 3⁄4" (44 mm) doors. Specify finish when ordering separately.

Optional EZ turn L583-363Available for rose and escutcheon trim. Disability turn (ADA) option to standard thumbturn. Can be used with thumbturn-function L Series lock except L9463 and L463. Specify lock per L583-363 when ordering.

Coin turnFor lock function L9044 and L9444 with rose trim. Specify 09-509 and finish per L283-124 when ordering.


Lockfunctions

LockcomponentsDeadbolt

Cylinder

Outside knob or lever

Inside knob or lever

Thumbturn

Thumbturn cylinder

Coin turn

Solid spindle

Two-piece spindle

Emergency turn piece

Occupancy indicator

Stopworks functions by turn-piece

Auxiliary guarded latch

Latchbolt with anti-friction tongue

Symbolkey

Productidentificationguide

Cylinder suffix

P = 6-pin full-face mortise cylinder with Schlage logo*

L = less full-face cylinder

C = concealed mortise cylinder

W = less concealed cylinder

R = full-size interchangeable core with Schlage logo

J = less full-size interchangeable core

F = full-size interchangeable core less Schlage logo

T = full-size construction core

BD = SFIC less core

BDC = disposable SFIC

GD = Everest patented SFIC

HD = construction SFIC

SFIC = Small Format (Best® style) Interchangeable CoreTo order less Schlage logo, specify lock “with K510-612 faceplate.”

LV = Vandlgard® function allows exterior lever to rotate

freely down while remaining securely locked.

L/LV 9 4 5 3 P

Lock series

L = standard

LV = vandlgard

0 = dummy trim without lock case

9 = functions with lock case

0 = no deadbolt

1 = dummy trim

4 = with deadbolt

Function


LockfunctionsANSIA156.13,Series1000

* In a double-door application where the dummy will be used as the strike order 10-091 Armored Front Strike separately.

Schlage ANSI

L9010 FO1

Passage latch

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side at all times. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

Schlage ANSI

L9444LV9444

Privacy with deadbolt and coin turn outside

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by inside thumbturn or outside coin turn. Throwing deadbolt locks outside knob/lever. Rotating inside knob/lever simultaneously retracts deadbolt and latchbolt, and unlocks outside knob/lever. Rotating outside coin turn retracts deadbolt and unlocks outside knob/lever. Specify per L283-056 for Torx screws. Available with rose trim only. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress. (Previously XL11-868)

L0170

Half dummy trim

Knob/lever on one side fixed by mounting bar.

L0172

Full dummy trim

Knob/lever on both sides fixed by mounting bar.

L9175

Half dummy trim with lock case

Fixed knob/lever on one side inoperable. Includes lock case and armored front. Options same as L9176 below.

L9176

Full dummy trim with lock case*

Fixed knob/lever on both sides. Includes lock case and blank armor front. May be ordered with optional XL11-743 armored front with cutout to receive deadbolt.

L9040 F22LV9040

Bath/bedroom privacy lock

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side unless outside is locked by inside thumbturn. Turning inside knob/lever or closing door unlocks outside knob/lever. To unlock from outside remove emergency button, insert emergency thumbturn (furnished) in access hole and rotate. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

L9044LV9044

Privacy with coin turn outside

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side unless outside is locked by inside thumbturn or outside coin turn. Operating inside knob/lever, closing door, rotating inside thumbturn or rotating outside cointurn unlocks outside knob/lever. Specify per L283-056 for Torx® screws. Available with rose trim only. (Previously XL11-868)

L9440LV9440 F19

Privacy with deadbolt

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by inside thumbturn. Throwing deadbolt locks outside knob/lever. Rotating inside knob/lever simultaneously retracts deadbolt and latchbolt, and unlocks outside knob/lever. To unlock from outside remove emergency button, insert emergency thumbturn in access hole and rotate. Inside liner is always free for immediate egress. (Previously XL11-761.)


LockfunctionsSinglecylindernon-deadboltfunctions

Schlage ANSI

L9050 F04LV9050

Office and inner entry lock

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side unless outside is made inoperative by key outside or by turning inside thumbturn. When outside is locked, latchbolt is retracted by key outside or by knob/lever inside. Outside knob/lever remains locked until thumbturn is returned to vertical or unlocked by key. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside liner is always free for immediate egress.

L9080EULV9080EU

Electrically unlocked (fail secure)

Outside knob/lever unlocked by 24V AC or DC. Latchbolt retracted by key outside or knob/lever inside. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

L9056LV9056

L9050 with automatic unlocking

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side unless outside is made inoperative by key outside or by rotating inside thumbturn. Outside knob/lever unlocked by key outside, thumbturn or closing door. Rotating inside knob/lever simultaneously retracts latchbolt and unlocks outside knob/lever. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

L9080EL-RX / LV9080EL-RXL9080EU-RX / LV9080EU-RX

Request to exit (RX) electrified lock

Same as L9080EL and L9080EU functions. In addition, a micro-switch positioned inside the lock case monitors the retractor crank, and is actuated when rotation of the inside or outside knob/levers rotates the retractor hub. The switch signals the use of that opening to security systems, allowing a non-disruptive means of immediate egress. Specify per L283-263 with L functions, specify L283-239 with LV functions. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

L9070 F05LV9070

Classroom lock

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side unless outside is locked by key. Unlocked from outside by key. Inside knob/lever always free for immediate exit. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

L9076 F06LV9076

Classroom holdback lock

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side unless outside is locked by key. When locked, latchbolt retracted by key outside or knob/lever inside. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Depress inside knob/lever and turn key 360° for holdback feature. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

L9080 F07LV9080

Storeroom lock

Latchbolt retracted by key outside or by knob/lever inside. Outside knob/lever is always inoperative. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

Schlage ANSI

L9080ELLV9080EL

Electrically locked (fail safe)

Outside knob/lever continuously locked by 24V AC or DC. Latchbolt retracted by key outside or by knob/lever inside. Switch or power failure allows outside knob/lever to retract latchbolt. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside knob/lever always free for immediate exit. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.


LockfunctionsSinglecylinderdeadboltfunctions

* In a double-door application where the dummy will be used as the strike order 10-091 Armored front strike separately.

Schlage ANSI

L9453 F20LV9453

Entrance lock

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side unless outside is locked by 20° rotation of thumbturn. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by 90° rotation of thumbturn. When locked, key outside or knob/lever inside retracts deadbolt and latchbolt simultaneously. Outside knob/lever remains locked until thumbturn is restored to vertical position. Throwing deadbolt automatically locks outside knob/lever. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

Schlage ANSI

L9485LV9485

Faculty/hotel/restroom lock

Latchbolt retracted by key outside or by knob/lever inside. Outside knob/lever always fixed. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by inside thumbturn. When deadbolt is thrown all keys become inoperative except emergency or display keys. Turning inside knob/lever retracts both deadbolt and latchbolt simultaneously. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

L9486 x L583-375LV9486 x L583-375

L9486 with “occupied” indicator

Latchbolt retracted by key outside or by knob/lever inside. Outside knob/lever always fixed. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by inside thumbturn. When deadbolt is thrown “Occupied” plate is displayed and all keys become inoperative except emergency keys. Turning inside knob/lever simultaneously retracts both deadbolt and latchbolt. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress. (Previously XL11-580)

L9456 F13LV9456

Corridor lock

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or inside thumbturn. Throwing deadbolt locks outside knob/lever. Turning inside knob/lever simultaneously retracts deadbolt and latchbolt and unlocks outside knob/lever. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

L9486 F15LV9486

Faculty/hotel/restroom lock “do not disturb” indicator

Latchbolt retracted by key outside or by knob/lever inside. Outside knob/lever always fixed. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by inside thumbturn. When deadbolt is thrown “do not disturb” plate is displayed. All keys become inoperative except emergency or display keys. Turning inside knob/lever retracts both deadbolt and latchbolt simultaneously. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

L9496

Privacy with “occupied” indicator

Knob/lever retracts latchbolt from either sideDeadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside (retraction by key required in the event of an emergency) or inside thumbturn. Throwing deadbolt locks outside knob/lever and displays “Occupied” plate. Rotating inside knob/lever simultaneously retracts both deadbolt and latchbolt, and unlocks outside knob/lever. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress. (Previously XL11-885)

L9465

Closet/storeroom lock

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside.

L9473 F21

Dormitory/bedroom lock

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or thumbturn inside.

L9480LV9480

Storeroom lock with deadbolt

Latchbolt retracted by key outside or by lever or knob inside. Outside knob/lever always fixed. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or thumbturn inside. Turning inside knob/lever simultaneously retracts both deadbolt and latchbolt. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress. (Previously XL11-591)

L9485 x XL11-557

Prison function lock

Latch retracted by key outside or knob inside. Outside knob always free spinning. Deadbolt only thrown or retracted by guard’s key. Inside knob becomes fixed when deadbolt is thrown. Prisoner’s key only retracts latchbolt. Furnished standard with tamper-resistant Torx screws. Specify per XL11-557.


LockfunctionsDoublecylindernon-deadboltfunctions

LockfunctionsDoublecylinderdeadboltfunctions

In a double-door application where the dummy will be used as the strike order 10-091 Armored front strike separately. *Caution: Double cylinder locks on residences and any door in any structure which is used for egress are a life safety hazard in times of emergency and their use is not recommended. Installation should be in accordance with existing codes only.

Schlage ANSI

L9060 F09LV9060

Apartment entrance lock

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side unless outside is locked by key from inside. When locked, latchbolt retracted by key outside or knob/lever inside. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

Schlage ANSI

L9457LV9457

Classroom security lock with deadbolt

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from either side. Throwing deadbolt locks outside knob/lever. Turning inside knob/lever simultaneously retracts deadbolt and latchbolt, and unlocks outside knob/lever. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

L9071LV9071

Classroom security lock

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side unless outside is locked by key from either side. When locked, latchbolt retracted by key outside or knob/lever inside. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is locked. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

L9466 F14

Store/utility room lock with deadbolt*

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from either side.

L9077LV9077

Classroom security holdback lock

Latchbolt retracted by knob/lever from either side unless outside is locked by key from either side. When locked, latchbolt retracted by key outside or knob/lever inside. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is locked. Depress inside knob/lever and turn key 360° for holdback feature. Inside lever is always free for immediate egress.

L9482 x XL11-943LV9482 x XL11-943

Institution lock with deadbolt*

Latchbolt retracted by key from either side. Knob/lever on both sides always inoperative. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key either side. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. Specify per XL11-543.

L9082 F30LV9082

Institution lock

Latchbolt retracted by key from either side. Knob/lever on both sides always inoperative. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed.

L9082ELL9082EU

L9082 electrically locked or electrically un-locked both sides*

EL: Outside and inside knob or lever continually locked electrically. Latchbolt retracted by key either side. Switch or power failure allows outside and inside knob/lever to retract latchbolt. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. EU: Outside and inside knob/lever unlocked electrically. Latchbolt retracted by key either side. Switch or power failure keeps inside and outside knob/lever locked. Auxiliary latch deadlocks latchbolt when door is closed. (Previously XL11-452)

20•Schlage• LSeries

LockfunctionsFullmortisedeadlocks

LockfunctionsSmallmortisedeadlocks

Schlage ANSI

L9460 F17

Cylinder x thumbturn lock

Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or thumbturn inside.

Schlage ANSI

L460 E06071

Cylinder x thumbturn lockDeadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or thumbturn inside.

L9462 F16

Double cylinder lock*

Deadbolt operated by key from either side.

L462 E06061

Double cylinder lock*

Deadbolt operated by key from either side.

L9463

Classroom lock

Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from outside. Inside thumbturn cylinder retracts deadbolt, but cannot project it.

L463 E06091

Classroom lock

Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from outside. Inside thumbturn cylinder retracts deadbolt, but cannot project it.

L9464 F18

Cylinder lock

Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from one side. No trim on opposite side.

L464 E06081

Cylinder lock

Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from one side. No trim on opposite side.

L9460 x XL11-635

L9460 with pull

Knob/lever both sides fixed. Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or thumbturn inside.

L480

Door bolt

Deadbolt thrown or retracted by thumbturn from one side. No trim on opposite site.

L9460 x XL11-886

Single cylinder deadlock with pull

Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or thumbturn inside. No latch, but inside knob or lever is spring-loaded. Rotating inside knob/lever also retracts deadbolt. Fixed outside knob/lever.

L496

Deadbolt with “occupied” indicator

Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key outside or thumbturn inside. When deadbolt is thrown “Occupied” plate is displayed. (Previously XL11-911)

L9462 x XL11-886

Double cylinder deadlock with pull*

Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from either side. No latch, but inside knob/lever is spring-loaded. Rotating inside knob/lever also retracts deadbolt. Fixed outside knob/lever.

L9464 x XL11-886

Deadlock with pull

Deadbolt thrown or retracted by key from one side. No latch, but inside knob/lever is spring-loaded. Rotating inside knob/lever also retracts deadbolt. Fixed outside knob/lever.


ANSI function

Function type Function description Transformation instructions Additional part(s)

F04 L9050 (w/thumbturn) office

Latchbolt operated by lever either side except when outside lever is made inoperative by a stop or other mechanical means other than key. When outside lever is locked, latchbolt is retracted by key from outside or by operating inside lever. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Install cloverleaf cam cylinder on outside; install thumbturn assembly 09-509-027 on inside.

No additional parts required.

F01 L9010 passage Latchbolt operated by lever from either side at all times.Do not install thumbturn unit 09-509-027 on inside or cylinder outside. Install chassis in the unlocked position.


F05 L9070 classroom

Latchbolt operated by lever either side except when outside lever is locked from outside by key or push button mechanism. When outside is locked latchbolt is retracted by key or by operating key or push button, and outside lever from outside or by operating inside lever. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Install cloverleaf cam cylinder on outside; do not install thumbturn assembly 09-509-027 on inside.


F07 L9080 storeroomLatchbolt operated by key outside or by operating inside lever. Outside lever always inoperative. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Do not install thumbturn 09-509-027 on inside. Install chassis in the locked position. Replace cloverleaf cam L583-153 with straight cam B502-948 (Everest), L583-255 with K510-680 (IC and SFIC) and install on outside.

Cams B502-948 (Everest), K510-680 (IC and SFIC) or L583-476 or L583-477 for modular cylinders

F09 L9060 apartment entranceLatchbolt operated by lever either side, except when made inoperative by key from inside. When outside is locked latchbolt is retracted by key from outside or by operating inside lever. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Do not install thumbturn 09-509-027 on inside. Install cloverleaf cam cylinder on inside. Replace clover leaf cam L583-153 with straight cam B502-948 (Everest), L583-255 with K510-680 (IC and SFIC) and install on outside.

Mortise cylinder assembly and cams B502-948 (Everest), K510-680 (IC and SFIC) or L583-476 or L583-477 for modular cylinders

F31L9080 (less outside cylinder) exit or communicating

Latchbolt operated by inside lever. Non-removable blank trim or no trim outside.

Do not install thumbturn unit 09-509-027 on inside. Install chassis in the locked position. Install inside lever with L285-150 mounting plate; do not install outside lever or cylinder.

Mounting plate L283-150

F32 L9071 classroom securityLatchbolt retracted by lever either side except when outside lever is locked by key from inside or outside. When outside lever is locked latchbolt is retracted by key either side or by inside lever. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Do not install thumbturn unit 09-509-027 on inside. Install cloverleaf cam cylinder on inside and outside.

Mortise cylinder assembly and cam L583-153

L9080 (less outside lever) service

Latchbolt operated by key outside or by operating inside lever. No outside lever. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Do not install thumbturn unit 09-509-027 on inside. Install chassis in the locked position. Replace cloverleaf cam L583-153 with straight cam B502-948 (Everest), L583-255 with K510-680 (IC and SFIC) and install on outside. Install inside lever with L285-150 mounting plate; do not install outside lever.

Cams B502-948 (Everest), K510-680 (IC and SFIC), mounting plate L283-150 or L583-476 or L583-477 for modular cylinders

L9080 (less inside trim) utilityLatchbolt retracted by key outside; outside lever always inoperative. No inside trim. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Do not install thumbturn unit 09-509-027 on inside. Install chassis in the locked position. Replace cloverleaf cam L583-153 with straight cam B502-948 (Everest), L583-255 with K510-680 (IC and SFIC) and install on outside. Install inside lever on outside with L283-150 mounting plate; do not install inside lever.


L9070 (less inside trim) closetLatchbolt operated by lever on outside except when outside lever is locked from outside by key. When outside is locked latchbolt is retracted by key or by operating key from outside lever. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Install cloverleaf cam cylinder on outside; do not install thumbturn assembly 09-509-027 on inside. Install inside trim on outside with L283-150 mounting plate.


* Assumes Everest cylinders and L9050 as base function (L283-133 chassis/L9050LB distributor lock case) — only applies to sectional trim (not escutcheon).

SchlageLSeriesuniversaltransformationinstructionsThe L9050 universal case can be transformed into nine different functions* with just a few additional parts.

For some functions, additional parts are not necessary.


ANSI function

Function type Function description Transformation instructions Additional part(s)

F04 L9050 (w/thumbturn) office

Latchbolt operated by lever either side except when outside lever is made inoperative by a stop or other mechanical means other than key. When outside lever is locked, latchbolt is retracted by key from outside or by operating inside lever. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Install cloverleaf cam cylinder on outside; install thumbturn assembly 09-509-027 on inside.


F01 L9010 passage Latchbolt operated by lever from either side at all times.Do not install thumbturn unit 09-509-027 on inside or cylinder outside. Install chassis in the unlocked position.


F05 L9070 classroom

Latchbolt operated by lever either side except when outside lever is locked from outside by key or push button mechanism. When outside is locked latchbolt is retracted by key or by operating key or push button, and outside lever from outside or by operating inside lever. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Install cloverleaf cam cylinder on outside; do not install thumbturn assembly 09-509-027 on inside.


F07 L9080 storeroomLatchbolt operated by key outside or by operating inside lever. Outside lever always inoperative. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Do not install thumbturn 09-509-027 on inside. Install chassis in the locked position. Replace cloverleaf cam L583-153 with straight cam B502-948 (Everest), L583-255 with K510-680 (IC and SFIC) and install on outside.

Cams B502-948 (Everest), K510-680 (IC and SFIC) or L583-476 or L583-477 for modular cylinders

F09 L9060 apartment entranceLatchbolt operated by lever either side, except when made inoperative by key from inside. When outside is locked latchbolt is retracted by key from outside or by operating inside lever. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Do not install thumbturn 09-509-027 on inside. Install cloverleaf cam cylinder on inside. Replace clover leaf cam L583-153 with straight cam B502-948 (Everest), L583-255 with K510-680 (IC and SFIC) and install on outside.

Mortise cylinder assembly and cams B502-948 (Everest), K510-680 (IC and SFIC) or L583-476 or L583-477 for modular cylinders

F31L9080 (less outside cylinder) exit or communicating

Latchbolt operated by inside lever. Non-removable blank trim or no trim outside.

Do not install thumbturn unit 09-509-027 on inside. Install chassis in the locked position. Install inside lever with L285-150 mounting plate; do not install outside lever or cylinder.


F32 L9071 classroom securityLatchbolt retracted by lever either side except when outside lever is locked by key from inside or outside. When outside lever is locked latchbolt is retracted by key either side or by inside lever. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Do not install thumbturn unit 09-509-027 on inside. Install cloverleaf cam cylinder on inside and outside.

Mortise cylinder assembly and cam L583-153

L9080 (less outside lever) service

Latchbolt operated by key outside or by operating inside lever. No outside lever. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Do not install thumbturn unit 09-509-027 on inside. Install chassis in the locked position. Replace cloverleaf cam L583-153 with straight cam B502-948 (Everest), L583-255 with K510-680 (IC and SFIC) and install on outside. Install inside lever with L285-150 mounting plate; do not install outside lever.


L9080 (less inside trim) utilityLatchbolt retracted by key outside; outside lever always inoperative. No inside trim. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Do not install thumbturn unit 09-509-027 on inside. Install chassis in the locked position. Replace cloverleaf cam L583-153 with straight cam B502-948 (Everest), L583-255 with K510-680 (IC and SFIC) and install on outside. Install inside lever on outside with L283-150 mounting plate; do not install inside lever.


L9070 (less inside trim) closetLatchbolt operated by lever on outside except when outside lever is locked from outside by key. When outside is locked latchbolt is retracted by key or by operating key from outside lever. Auxiliary deadlatch.

Install cloverleaf cam cylinder on outside; do not install thumbturn assembly 09-509-027 on inside. Install inside trim on outside with L283-150 mounting plate.


* Assumes Everest cylinders and L9050 as base function (L283-133 chassis/L9050LB distributor lock case) — only applies to sectional trim (not escutcheon).

B502-948 K510-680

Cylinder Only Compr. Ring & SpringMortise cylinder assembly

L583-153

L283-150

L283-150

L283-150

L283-150

Schlage L9060 Outside and Other Straight Cam Applications

L583-477

Dim. X = .35Y = .72

L583-476

Dim. X = .35Y = .72

L583-47611⁄8"/ 13⁄8"/ 15⁄8"

L583-47711⁄4"/ 11⁄2"/ 13⁄4"

B502-948 K510-680


L583-477

Dim. X = .35Y = .72

L583-476

Dim. X = .35Y = .72

L583-47611⁄8"/ 13⁄8"/ 15⁄8"

L583-47711⁄4"/ 11⁄2"/ 13⁄4"

B502-948

B502-948

K510-680

K510-680


L583-477

Dim. X = .35Y = .72


L583-477

Dim. X = .35Y = .72

L583-476

Dim. X = .35Y = .72

L583-476

Dim. X = .35Y = .72

L583-47611⁄8"/ 13⁄8"/ 15⁄8"

L583-47611⁄8"/ 13⁄8"/ 15⁄8"

L583-47711⁄4"/ 11⁄2"/ 13⁄4"

L583-47711⁄4"/ 11⁄2"/ 13⁄4"

L583-27411⁄8"/ 13⁄8"/ 15⁄8"

L583-275For housing sizes: 1¹⁄4 , 1¹⁄2 , 1³⁄4"

Dim. X = .261Y = .644

L583-274For housing sizes: 1¹⁄8 , 1³⁄8, 15⁄8"

Dim. X = .261Y = .644

L583-27511⁄4"/ 11⁄2"/ 13⁄4"


Door preparation for L9000 Series

8"

203 mm

1-1/4"

32 mm

2-3/4"

70 mm

6-1/4 "

159 mm

4-1/2"

114 mm

1"

25 mm

3-7/8"

98 mm

5-9/16"

141 mm

1-1/4"

32 mm

2-3/4"

70 mm

3-3/4"

95 mm

4-1/2"

114 mm

1"

25 mm

Door preparation for L400 Series

CertificationsANSI:

L9000: ANSI A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1

Operational and Security, UL Listed for 3-hour

fire door (except L9076 and L9007). With

interchangeable core cylinders: Grade 2 Security.

With concealed shell cylinder: A156.13 Grade 1

Operational and Security. ANSI/ASTM F476-76

Grade 40, UL Listed. L400: ANSI A156.5 Grade 1.

California State Reference Code:

(Formerly Title 19, California State Fire

Marshal Standard) All levers with returns

comply; levers return to within 1⁄2" of door face.

UL / cUL:

All locks listed for A label single doors, 4' by 10'.

Letter F and UL symbol on latch front indicate

listing. Electrified functions are UL19X Listed for

single-point locking applications. UL437 Listed

locking cylinder optional: specify Primus 20-500

Series cylinder.

SpecificationsHanding:

L9000 Series lock bodies are field-reversible without

disassembly. L400 Series locks are non-handed.

Door thickness:

13⁄4" (44 mm) standard. 13⁄8" (35 mm) to 21⁄2" (64 mm) optional.

Over 21⁄2" (64 mm) door ranges vary by function. No escutcheon

available for 13⁄4" (44 mm) doors standard. 2" to 23⁄8" (51 mm to

60 mm) optional. Specify door thickness if other than 13⁄4".

Backset:

23⁄4" (70 mm) only.

Armored front:

L9000 Series: 11⁄4" x 8" x 7⁄32" (32 mm x 203 mm x 6 mm)

standard. 11⁄16" x 8" x 17⁄32" (27 mm x 203 mm x 6 mm) optional.

L400 Series: 47⁄16" x 35⁄8" x 1" (113 mm x 92 mm x 25 mm)

Case size:



Spacing:

Knob or lever to cylinder, 37⁄8" (98mm); knob or lever to

thumbturn hub, 211⁄16" (68mm).

Bolts:

1" (25mm) throw stainless steel deadbolt and 3⁄4" (19mm) throw

stainless steel latch with anti-friction tongue.

Exposed trim:

Knobs: #41 and #42 heavy-duty wrought brass,

bronze or stainless steel knobs match D Series knobs.

Levers: Forged brass or bronze and cast stainless steel. Designs

available to match D Series levers.

93 Lever design: Extruded brass, bronze or stainless steel.

Mediterranean designs: Forged-brass lever and rose.

Escutcheons: L escutcheons are cold-forged brass or bronze and

stainless steel. N escutcheons are heavy wrought reinforced

brass, bronze and stainless steel.

Trim combinations: Available with knob both sides, lever both

sides, or knob and lever with rose or escutcheon both sides.

Strike:

L9000 Series: ANSI curved lip strike 11⁄4" x 47⁄8"

(32 mm x 124 mm) x 13⁄16" (30 mm) lip to center with dust

box standard. L400 Series: 11⁄8" x 35⁄8" (29 mm x 92 mm) with

dust box.

Cylinder & keys:

6-pin Everest C123 keyway cylinder with two patented

keys standard.

Keying options:

Interchangeable core and Primus high security cylinders. Master

keying, grand master keying and construction keying.

34•Schlage• LSeries

HowtoorderTo order Schlage products, descriptive data should be in the same sequence as shown.

1 Line item number

2 Quality

3 Complete model number with function and cylinder type

To order cylinder options, change “P” at the end of the model number as follows:

L9453P Standard

L9453L Less standard cylinder. For Primus cylinder, specify this option and order Primus cylinder separately.

L945C With temporary plastic construction cylinder. Double cylinder functions ordered less

cylinder are furnished with these construction cylinders to maintain timing of key cams.

L9453J Prepared for full size interchangeable core, less core. For Primus core, specify this option and order Primus core separately.

L9453R With full-size conventional interchangeable core installed. Order control keys separately.

L9453T With full-size (temporary) construction core installed. Order all keys separately.

L9453BD Prepared for small format (Falcon, Best, etc.) interchangeable core (SFIC), less core.

L9453GD With Everest B Family restricted keyway small format core installed. Order control keys separately.

L9453HD With small format keyed brass construction core installed. Order all keys separately.

L9453BDC With small format disposable plastic construction core installed.

4/5 Outside design / finish. Specify tactile warning (knurling) here as “8” before lever design, e.g. 803. To specify complete design, combine the numeric knob or lever design with the alpha rose or escutcheon design. Example: 03L, 93A, 42B. When ordering Mediterranean design levers with L escutcheons, specify AST/00L, AVA/00L or MER/00L.

6/7 Inside design/finish. Leave blank if same as outside.

8 Hand. One hand per line item.

9 Front (use “Strike” field on Schlage form). Leave blank for standard armored front or enter number for narrow front.

10 Strike. Leave blank for standard or specify part number for optional strike. LLL = Less strike.

11 Door thickness, if non-standard. Example: 200 = 2".

12 Extension, to specify whether thick door is extended inside (EI), outside (EO), differently (ED) or equally (EE).

13 Dimension for strike lip lengths. See strike page for availability of specific dimensions with specific strikes.

14 Keying detail (e.g. key symbol, keyway, bitting) and other special requirements.

Line item Qty ProductOutside Inside

Hand Front Strike Door thickness Ext Dim Additional detailsDes Fin Des Fin

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Example

Line item Qty ProductOutside Inside

Hand Front Strike Door thickness Ext Dim Additional detailsDes Fin Des Fin

1 50 L9453P 03A 626 RH 10-0912 50 L9453P 03A 626 LH 10-0913 10 L9040 03A 626 RH 1384 10 L9040 03A 626 625 LH 09-668 1385 50 L9456P 07L 626 625 RH 09-6686 50 L9456P 07L 626 LH

Note: Schlage order forms are available at no charge by contacting your Allegion security & safety consultant or customer service.

Cylinder Only Cylinder with Compression Ring & Spring

Cylinder with Blocking Ring

Cylinder Only Cylinder with Compression Ring & Spring

Cylinder with Blocking Ring

100 = 1" 118 = 11⁄8"

114 = 11⁄4" 138 = 13⁄8"

112 = 11⁄2" 134 = 13⁄4"

200 = 2"


SL -1SL -1

SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE

1" x 6-7/8" FaceplateMS Deadbolt

ANSI/BHMA Type E8281/E8291 (Grade1)MS1850S-050 Series

Steel with corrosion-resistant plating. 1" x 6" x depth. (Depth varies by backset. See table on back page).

Case

Cylinder Backset

360 turn of key or thumbturn throws or retracts the counterbalanced bolt. Key can be removed only when bolt is in a positively locked or unlocked position. Lock accepts any standard 1-5/32" diameter mortise cylinder or thumbturn from either or both sides. Cylinder must have MS dimensioned cam. (See page SW-30).Æ

7/8", 31/32", 1-1/8" or 1-1/2" only.

FunctionThe MS Hookbolt deadlock answers the security need of sliding glass doors in commercial, industrial and institutional buildings. The mechanism is identical to the widely used Maximum Security swinging door lock, except that the massive laminated bolt is provided in a hook shape to resist the parting motion of sliding door and jamb. The overcenter MS locking action assures that forced entry attempts to pry the door in any direction, up, down or sideways, will be defeated.

Æ

Æ

See back page for dimensions of strike slot which can be cut in metal jamb. Trim plate, box strike and armored strike are also available. (See page SW-16).

5/8" x 1-3/8" with 13/16" throw. Eight-ply laminated stainless steel with Alumina Ceramic core defeats any hacksaw attack (including so-called super hacksaws) while hook shape repels prybar attempts to "spread" door from its jamb or lift it off its track.

Bolt

Strike

Operation

260 Santa Fe StreetPomona, California 91767(800) 872-3267 Fax:(800) 232-7329www.adamsrite.com

MS1850S-050 DeadboltR

000810 SL MS1850S-050 ©2000 ADAMS RITE MANUFACTURING CO.

DIMENSIONS INSTALLATION

OPTIONSCylinder backset and faceplate finish and shape (radiused, flat or bevel cross-section to match door nose) must be specified.

HOW TO ORDER

Backset1

234

7/831/32"1-1/8"1-1/2"

Handing

555650

LH or RHRRH or LHRNon-Handed*

Faceplate Shape1850S1851S1851SW1852S

FlatRadiusRadius w/wístripBevel

MS1850S 628250

Specify quantity and the following information. Order related hardware separately.

Nominal, subject to tolerance extremes.

INCHESMILLIMETERS

Individually boxed with machine screws for mounting. Cylinders and/or thumbturn available at extra cost. Shipping weight: 1-1/2 lbs. Also available in a 25 unit pack for volume users.

STANDARD PACKAGEFinish

628313335

Satin Aluminum"Bronze" AnodizedBlack Anodized

Stile Preparation

BACKSET "A"

7/8"

31/32"

1-1/8"

1-1/2"

22.0

24.6

28.6

38.1

1.57

1.63

1.78

2.25

39.9

41.4

45.2

57.1

ARMOREDFACEPLATE

1" x 6-7/8"

FLAT MS1850S-050

RADIUS MS1851S-050

LH BEVEL MS1852S-055

RH BEVEL MS1852S-056

RADIUS w/WEATHERSTRIPMS1851SW-050

*Any flat or radius face.

.6215.7

1.0025.4

.8822.4

"A" SHOWN WITHFLAT FACEPLATE

1.2531.7 DIA. HOLE

CUTOUT TOLERANCE:

+ .015_ .000

+ 0.38_ 0.00

6.885174.88

1.59440.49

1.01025.65

.156 R3.97

(4 PLCS.)

BACKSET

STILECL

MS1850S-050 Series locks are operable by any standard 1-5/32" diameter mortise cylinder with special MS cam dimensioned as shown. Cylinders with MS cams can be readily obtained from most cylinder manufacturers. See page SW-30 for cylinder make and trim ring information.

®

®

Cylinder Cam

CYLINDERCL

.1824.62

.80020.32

.120 R 3.05

CAM TOLERANCE:+_+_ 0.13

.005

CYLINDERCL

CL

FLAT

RADIUS

CL

HOW BACKSETIS MEASURED

Lock & CylinderInstallation

.9223.4

2.1955.6

LC

.256.3

.6817.3

1.9449.3

LCLOCK & STILE CYLINDER

STRIKE CUTOUT

BEVEL

CL

6.00152.4

BACKSET MEASUREDAT CENTERLINE OFSTILE NOSE

6.88174.7

6.81173.0

.348.4

.225.6

.8120.6

.256.3

6.38162.0

.5413.7

.6215.7

Cylinder Only Compr. Ring & Spring With Blocking Ring

Ives Architectural hardware productsF2

Lock Guards

BPu

lls &

Pla

tes

AH

inge

s &

Piv

ots

CFl

ush

Bolt

s & C

oord

inat

ors

DLa

tche

s, C

atch

es &

Bol

tsE Stop

sF2

Exte

rior H

ardw

are

GM

isce

llane

ous H

ardw

are

LG1 Lock GuardLG7 • Unitsarenon-handedandincorporatesecurityframepinto

prevent separation of the door and frame . LG7 does not incorporate the security frame pin

• Unitcoversthelatchboltareaofthedoorandlock,therebyproviding added protection from burglars, vandals or normal abuse .

• Idealforusewithmortiseorcylindricallocks. • Easyinstallation. • Throughboltedwithcarriageboltsandnuts. • Availableinavarietyofmaterials,13gaugestainlesssteel,

12 gauge steel and brass material .

Dimensions3" Wide x 11-1/2" HighBolt center to center: 10-1/2"

LG10 Lock Guard • Ideallysuitedforusewithroseorescutcheon2-3/4"wideorless. • ForusewithType86MortiseandType161CylindricalLocks

(ANSI 156 .13 Series 1000 and ANSI 156 .2 Series 4000) . • Noexposedfastenersonfaceofunit. • Uniquedesignprovidesmaximumsecurity,virtuallyeliminatingthe

opening between door and frame at the latch point . • Availablein13GaugeStainlessSteelor12GaugeSteel.

Dimensions2-1/2" Wide x 9-1/2" HighStud center to center: 8-1/2"

FinishesIves Number USP* US2G* US4* US10* US32D SP313*

BHMA 600 603 606 612 630 695

* not available on LP7

FinishesIves Number USP US32D

BHMA 600 630


Lock Guards

BPulls &

PlatesA

Hinges &

PivotsC

Flush Bolts & Coordinators

DLatches, Catches &

BoltsEStops

F3

Exterior Hardw

areG

Miscellaneous H

ardware

LG11 Lock Guard • Designedforuseonaluminumdoorswithlatch-typelocks

or doors equipped with electric strikes . • UnitisHanded-Specifyleftorrighthandwhenordering. • Noexposedfastenersonfaceofunit. • Uniquedesignprovidesmaximumsecurity,virtuallyeliminatingthe

opening between door and frame at latch point . • Availablein13GaugeStainlessSteelor12GaugeSteel.

Dimensions2-1/2" Wide x 9-1/2" HighStud center to center: 8-1/2"

LG12 Lock Guard • Narrowdesignunitforuseonroseorescutcheon3-1/2"orless. • ForusewithType86MortiseandType161CylinderLocks

(ANSI 156 .13 Series 1000 and ANSI 156 .2 Series 4000) . • Noexposedfastenersonfaceofunit. • Uniquedesignprovidesmaximumsecurity,virtuallyeliminatingtheopening

between door and frame at the latch point . • Availablein13GaugeStainlessSteelor12GaugeSteel

Dimensions1-1/2" Wide x 9-1/2" High

Stud center to center: 8-1/2”

FinishesIves Number US32D SP313

BHMA 630 695

FinishesIves Number USP US32D

BHMA 600 630

Ives Architectural hardware productsB9

Architectural Door Trim

B9

Pulls & Plates

AH

inges & Pivots

CFlush Bolts &

CoordinatorsD


EStopsF

Exterior Hardw

areG

Miscellaneous H

ardware

Finishes brassUS Number US3 US4 US10 US10B US15 US26 US26D*

BHMA 605 606 612 613 619 625 626

Finishes stainless steelUS Number US32 US32D*

BHMA 629 630

9103EzHD Straight Pull/Pushbar Combo (8103EZHD Pull + 9100HD Push)Available mounting – NO or NS see page B17 with heavy duty 3/8-16” mounting

Projection Product No . CTC Push CTC Pull Push & Pull

9103EZ 28”, 33” 8” 2-1/2” & 3-1/2”9103EZ 28”, 33” 10” 2-1/2” & 3-1/2”9103EZ 28”, 33” 12” 2-1/2” & 3-1/2”

9190HD Offset Pull/Pushbar Combo (8190HD pull + 9100HD push)Available mounting – NO or NS see page B17with heavy duty 3/8-16” mounting

Projection Product No . CTC Push CTC Pull Push & Pull

9190 28”, 33” 8” 2-1/2” & 3-1/4”9190 28”, 33” 10” 2-1/2” & 3-1/4”9190 28”, 33” 12” 2-1/2” & 3-1/4”9190 28”, 33” 18” 2-1/2” & 3-1/4”

Finishes brassUS Number US3 US4 US10 US10B US15 US26 US26D*

BHMA 605 606 612 613 619 625 626

Finishes stainless steelUS Number US32 US32D*

BHMA 629 630

* Available with Antimicrobial Coating, use suffix AM

Special lengths available, consult factory

* Available with Antimicrobial Coating, use suffix AM

Special lengths available, consult factory

1”ROUND

1”ROUND



B16

Pulls

& P

late

sA

Hin

ges

& P

ivot

sC

Flus

h Bo

lts &

Coo

rdin

ator

sD

Latc

hes,

Cat

ches

& B

olts

E Stop

sF

Exte

rior H

ardw

are

GM

isce

llane

ous H

ardw

are

Mounting •Allmountinghardwareisforstandard1-3/4”door. •ConsultCustomerServiceifotherthanstandard.

Back to Back Pull MountingAvailable only for 8121-5 Pulls .

•(4)Steelscrewsleevenuts;steelzincplated.• (8)No.8-32x1”brassovalheadmachinescrews;platedtomatch.Pulls furnished in pairs (PR) .

Type K Mount



B17

Pulls & Plates

AH

inges & Pivots

CFlush Bolts &

CoordinatorsD


EStopsF

Exterior Hardw

areG

Miscellaneous H

ardware

Type NS-Standard Push/Pull Mounting Type N & Standard

Pushbar to Pull - (1) 3/8 - 16 X 3”steel countersunk trim head machine screws with (2) set screws . - (1) steel screw sleeve, zinc plated .

Free End Pushbar & Pull - (2) 3/8 - 16 X 2-1/4” brass, oval head mach screws; plated to match . - (2) No . 14 countersunk washers; plated to match .

Type NO Push/Pull Mounting Type N & Type O

Pushbar to Pull - (1) 3/8 -16 X 3”steel countersunk trim head machine screws with (2) set screws . - (1) steel screw sleeve, zinc plated .Free End Pushbar & Pull - (2) 3/8 - 16 X 2-1/4” blind thru-bolts; plated to match .

Mounting for 8103Ez, 8190, 9100, 9103Ez, 9190 and 9264, 9265, 9266 and 9267 long door pulls. •Allmountinghardwareisforstandard1-3/4”door. •ConsultCustomerServiceifotherthanstandard.

Type J/N Mount Type O Mount

Type P Mount

(push) (pull)

Back to Back “Two-Anchor” Wood or Metal Door

Available only for 8103EZHD, 8190HD, 9100HD push/pull combinations and 9264, 9265, 9266 and 9267 long door pulls .

•(2)3/8-16x2-3/4”steelcountersunktrimheadmachinescrewswith (4) set screws for maximum anchoring force .

• (2)Steelscrewsleeves;zincplated.

Decorative Blind Thru - Bolt Wood or Metal Door

Available only for 8103EZHD, 8190HD and 9100HD Series Push/Pull Combinations .

•(2)3/8-16x2-1/4”blindthru-bolts;platedtomatch.

1/2” Glass DoorAvailable only for 8103EZHD, 8190HD, 9100HD, 9265 and 9266 long door pulls .

•(2)3/8-16x2-1/4”steelcountersunktrimheadmachinescrewswith (4) set screws for maximum anchoring force .

• (2)Steelscrewsleeves;zincplated•(2)MetalandVinylwashers

14

90 Series Surface Overhead Door Holders/Stops

90 Series Heavy-DutyGlynn-Johnson 90 series holders and stops are the most ruggedmodels available for heavy-duty applications. The channel is surface-mounted to the door, most often with sex bolts, and thejamb bracket is surface mounted to the jamb, requiring minimaldoor and frame preparation.

These versatile units can be used in conjunction with most surface-applied door closers. The provided templates allow for variable mounting positions, ranging from 85º to 110º Hold-Open/Stop angle. These templates are designed for installation in almost all types of doors, including doors with conventional butt-type hinges or specialty hinges.

Four Models:• 90H Series Hold-Open Model• 90S Series Stop-Only Model• 90F Series Friction Hold-Open Model• 90SE Series Special Stop-Only Model

Five Sizes:• Simple• Standardized• Each model is available in five sizes

Three Options:• J—Angle Jamb Bracket• SHIM—Blade Stop Shim Kits• SOC—Pin-in-Socket Security Screw Package

Unmatched Convenience:• Non-Handed• Improved Compatibility with Door Closers• Single-Acting Doors• Interior/Exterior Applications• Durable• Easy to Install• Improved Corrosion Resistance• Function Conversion Kits Available

Materials and Finishes:In 300 series Stainless Steel, Brass and Steel substrates, these models are available in the largest selection of finishes in the industry. Stainless Steel models offer the highest resistance to corrosion. Available in the following finishes:

Finish DescriptionUS3 Polished BrassUS4 Satin BrassUS10 Satin BronzeUS10B Oil Rubbed BronzeUS32 Polished Stainless SteelUS32D Satin Stainless SteelSP4 Powder Coat BrassSP10 Powder Coat BronzeSP28 Powder Coat AluminumSP313 Powder Coat Dark BronzeSPBLK Powder Coat Black652 Chrome-like Coating

ModelsGlynn-Johnson 90 series door holders and stops provide long-lasting protection for doors, frames and hardware. All models incorporate a heavy-duty channel/slide-arm design and offset jamb bracket. This unique design allows for simplefield modification of functions, should user requirements change.

90H Series Hold-Open (Suffix H) Hold-Open models provide a convenient method of holding the door open at a predetermined position for short or long periods of time, permitting an unobstructed traffic flowthrough the opening. The Hold-Open function can easily be turned on or off by simply rotating the serrated knob on the bottom of the channel. This knob engages the Hold-Open mechanism, allowing the door to be held open at a predeterminedposition ranging from 85º to 110º. When the knob is flipped over, it acts as a stop and shock absorber.

The tension on the Hold-Open mechanism can be adjusted using a phillips screwdriver to offset air currents or other exteriorconditions. The Hold-Open tension adjustment is located on the top of the slider in the channel.

90S Series Stop-Only (Suffix S) When the Hold-Open function is not a requirement,Stop-Only models provide a reliable method of door control. Stop-Only models provide the same shock-absorbing capability as Hold-Open models. The Stop-Only model may be used on fire doors.

90F Series Friction Hold-Open (Suffix F) Friction Hold-Open models are ideal for patient roomdoors, wardrobe and closet doors or similar applications where multiple Hold-Open positions are desired. The friction tension canbe adjusted through the top of the channel using an allen wrench.The friction tension adjustment is located on the top of the slider inthe channel.

15

90SE Series Special Stop-Only (Suffix SE) When Stop-Only models are used in conjunction with single-point, Hold-Only electronic door closers, the Stop-Only function may be ordered without the shock-absorbing mechanism. Used as an auxiliary stop, these models prolong the life of the closer. The stop location is adjusted using an allenwrench on the stop block located in the channel.

Note: Caution should be taken when using this option in other applications, asthe elimination of the shock-absorbing spring can put added stress on the doorand frame.

Application InformationUL ClassificationThe 90 series Stop-Only models are classified by UnderwritersLaboratories (UL) as Miscellaneous Fire Door Accessories. Thisclassification applies to use on either Hollow Metal Fire Doors orWood Fire Doors. These units may be used on doors of any rating.As a reminder, the Miscellaneous Fire Door Accessories (GVUX)section is defined by UL as: “Miscellaneous fire door accessoriesare intended in the individual Listings. The accessories have beeninvestigated to determine that when installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, the accessories do not adverselyaffect the fire rating of the fire door and/or fire door frames.”

Dead-Stop Templating:Dead-stop templating is recommended for applications where awall or similar obstruction is placed at an opening angle of 110º or less (i.e., doors that open back-to-back). Dead-stop templatingcan be applied to Hold-Open, Stop-Only and Friction models. The Dead-Stop position is the point at which the shock-absorbing spring is fully compressed. Therefore, when Dead-Stop Templatingis used, the initial degree of opening will be 5º to 7º less than theDead-Stop opening.

Example: If the holder is templated to a 100º Dead Stop, the door will holdopen at an angle between 93º and 95º but no further than 100º

Note: Do not use dead-stop templating on the 90SE Series since there is noshock-absorbing spring.

Environmental Considerations:Environmental factors should always be considered when specifying overhead holders and stops. Doors that are positioned on a building’s exterior or subject to corrosive conditions should be equipped with a holder constructed primarily of stainless steel or brass materials. For interior applications, steel is acceptable,though brass substrates generally provide a more attractive architectural-grade finish.

Function Conversion Kits• FK90H—Converts a 90F or a 90S unit into a 90H unit.

To order specify FK90H.• FK90F—Converts a 90H or a 90S unit into a 90F unit.

To order specify FK90F.• FK90SE—Converts a 90H, 90F or a 90S unit into a 90SE unit. To

order specify FK90SE–Finish.• No kit is needed to convert a 90H or 90F unit into a 90S unit.

OptionsSuffix J (Angle Jamb Bracket):An angle jamb bracket is available for converting standard modelsto hinge-side or flush transom mounting. The angle jamb bracketaffixes to the standard jamb bracket. If ordered with the unit addsuffix J. If needed separately order 90J by finish needed.

Suffix SOC (Pin-in-Socket Security Screws):A screw package with pin-in-socket screws for mounting the doorbracket and the jamb bracket is provided instead of the standardscrew package.

Suffix SHIM (Blade Stop Shims):Shim kits are available in 3 sizes90 SHIM1 is a 1/4" Shim Kit90 SHIM2 is a 1/2" Shim Kit90 SHIM3 is a 3/4" Shim Kit

If ordered with overhead, add suffix SHIM (1, 2 or 3). If needed separately order 90 SHIM (1, 2 or 3)–Finish.

16

90 Series Surface Overhead Door Holders/Stops

The template information on this page is for reference only and is not intended to serve as an installation template. For complete dimensional information, refer to Glynn-Johnson template book.

1'

1/4"

3-1/4"

2-5/8"

1/4"

1-1/2"

1-1/2"

1/4"

1-7/8"1-3/16"

BUTTS/OFFSET PIVOTS CENTER HUNG

DOOR STOP HOLD DOOR STOP HOLDSIZE OPENING ONLY OPEN FRICTION OPENING ONLY OPEN FRICTION

1 ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---- ---- ----2 23-1/16"–27" 902S 902H 902F 27-1/16"–33" 902S 902H 902F3 27-1/16"–33" 903S 903H 903F 33-1/16"–39" 903S 903H 903F 4 33-1/16"–39" 904S 904H 904F 39-1/16"–45" 904S 904H 904F5 39-1/16"–45" 905S 905H 905F 45-1/16"–51" 905S 905H 905F6 45-1/16"–51" 906S 906H 906F 51-1/16"–59" 906S 906H 906F

90 Series Sizing Chart

* First numeral (0) designates optional material.

To specify: Brass material, change 0 to 1 (i.e. C12511)Stainless Steel material, change 0 to 5 (i.e. C52511)Steel material, change 0 to 8 (i.e. C82511)

Note: This chart illustrates the most common types of hinging and door opening sizes. For unusual door details, contact Glynn-Johnson for availability.

BHMA/ANSI, A156.8 & FED. Spec. Cross ReferenceG-J Model BHMA* FED. Spec.902 - 906H C02511 1161902 - 906S C02541 1161A902 - 906F C02531 —

17

How to Order

Overhead Series:90

Size (Door Opening Using Butts or Offset Pivots):2 (23-1/16"–27")3 (27-1/16"–33")4 (33-1/16"–39")5 (39-1/16"–45")6 (45-1/16"–54")

Function:H Hold-OpenF Friction Hold-OpenS Stop-OnlySE Special Stop-Only

Finishes:US3 Polished BrassUS4 Satin BrassUS10 Satin BronzeUS10B Oil Rubbed BronzeUS32 Polished Stainless SteelUS32D Satin Stainless SteelSP4 Powder Coat BrassSP10 Powder Coat BronzeSP28 Powder Coat AluminumSP313 Powder Coat Dark BronzeSPBLK Powder Coat Black652 Chrome-like Coating

Options:J Angle Jamb BracketSHIM Blade Stop Shims—

SHIM1–1/4" KitSHIM2–1/2" KitSHIM3–3/4" Kit

SOC Pin-in-Socket Security Screws

__ __ __ – ______ – __90 4 H US32D J

54 55PHONE 877-671-7011FAX 800-248-1460www.allegion.com/us 2/14

n Standard 4110 Series closer is shipped with Extra Duty arm, standard plastic cover, 4110-201 FIFTH SCREW SPACER and self reaming and tapping screws. See 4110 Series pages 57 & 58 for options.

n Sized cylinders adjustable for interior doors to 5’0˝ and exterior doors to 4´0˝.

n Non-sized cylinder adjustable for interior doors to 4´6˝ and exterior doors to 3´6˝.

n Closer mounts parallel arm, specify right or left swinging door.

n 4111 cylinder meets ADA requirements. See 4110 Series page 59.

n Standard or optional custom powder coat finish.

n Optional plated finish on metal cover, arm and fasteners.

n Optional SRI primer for installations in corrosive conditions is available with powder coat only.

n The 4110 Series is UL and cUL listed for self-closing doors without hold-open.

n Tested and certified under ANSI Standard A156.4, grade one.

The 4110 is LCN’s best performing

heavy duty closer designed

specifically for institutional

and other rugged high traffic

applications.

n Cast Iron n Extra Duty Forged Steel Arm

Standard n Double Heat Treated Steel Pinion n All Weather Fluid n Advanced Variable Backcheck n LCN Patented Green Dial n UL & cUL Listed n Peel-n-Stick Templates for Fast and

Accurate Installations

*PARALLEL ARM (PUSH SIDE) MOUNT

*4110 HCUSH mount shown

Closer available with less than 5.0 lbs. opening force on 36" door. ** Maximum opening/hold-open point with standard template. *** Advanced Variable Backcheck.

AVAILABLE NOT AVAILABLE

4110 SERIES

FEAT

URES

The 4110 Series includes theLCN® "Green Dial"

Spring Force Indicator

180° 110° 110°180°

PLASTIC

METAL

HINGE (PULL)

SIDE

TOP JAMB (PULL

)

TOP JAMB (PUSH)

STANDARD (S

INGLE)

REGULA

R (DOUBLE)

HOLD-O

PEN

FUSIB

LE LI

NK

EDA/HEDA

CUSH/HCUSH

SCUSH/SHCUSH

PARALLEL A

RM

STOP FACE

MOUNTING COVER CYLINDER **ARM FUNCTIONFINISH

NON-HANDED

NON-SIZED

ACCESSIBILI

TY

DELAYED ACTIO

N

AVB***

POWDER COAT

PLATED

DOUBLE EGRESS

56PHONE 877-671-7011FAX 800-248-1460www.allegion.com/us 2/14

n Butt Hinges should not exceed 5˝ (127 mm) in width.

n Auxiliary Stop is recommended at hold-open point, where a door cannot swing 180°, or where CUSH-N-STOP arm is not used.

n Clearance for EDA, or CUSH shoe is 5-1/2˝ (140 mm) from door face.

n Top Rail less than 5-1/8˝ (130 mm) measured from stop requires PLATE, 4110-18. Plate requires 2˝ (51 mm) minimum measured from the stop.

n Stop Width minimum 1˝ (25 mm).

n Head Frame flush or rabetted requires CUSH FLUSH PANEL ADAPTER, 4110-419.

n Reveal less than 2-3/4˝ (70 mm), use CUSH SHOE SUPPORT, 4110-30 with CUSH arms.

n Blade Stop Spacer, 4110-61 required to clear 1/2˝ (13 mm) blade stop.

n Cush Arm requires CUSH SHOE SUPPORT, 4110-30 for fifth screw anchorage with CUSH arms.

n Delayed Action Add suffix “DEL” to selected cylinder (eg. 4111 DEL). Not available with 4116 cylinder. Delays closing from maximum opening to approximately 70°. Delay time adjustable up to approximately 1 minute.

n Advanced Variable Backcheck cylinder starts backcheck at approximately 45° instead of the normal 75°. Add suffix “AVB” to selected cylinder.

*

*5-11/16˝ (144 mm) For Fusible Link Arm Applications

PARALLEL ARM (PUSH SIDE) MOUNTING

MAXIMUM OPENINGEDA or Fusible Link arm can be templated for100°,

A = 5-15/16˝ (151 mm) B = 7-1/4˝ (184 mm)

140°, A = 4-7/16” (113 mm) B = 5-3/4˝ (146 mm)

or 180°. A = 2-15/16˝ (75 mm) B = 4-1/4˝ (108 mm)

Hold-open points up to maximum opening with HEDA or Fusible Link arm.

CUSH arm can be templated for maximum opening at85°,

A = 8-5/16˝ (211 mm) B = 9-5/8˝ (244 mm)

90°, A = 7-11/16˝ (195 mm) B = 9˝ (229 mm)

100°, A = 6-7/16˝ (164 mm) B = 7-3/4˝ (197 mm)

or 110°. A = 5-9/16˝ (141 mm) B = 6-7/8˝ (175 mm)

Hold-open point at maximum opening with HCUSH arm. Spring Cush hold-open points are approximately 5˚ less than templated stop point.

4110 SERIES M

OUNT

ING

DETA

ILS

Options n Size 6 or non-sized cylinder. n Delayed Action and/or Advanced

Variable Backcheck cylinder. n HEDA, CUSH, HCUSH, SPRING

CUSH, SPRING HCUSH or Fusible Link arm.

n Metal cover.

Special Templates Customized installation templates or products may be available to solve unusual applications. Contact LCN Product Support for assistance.


CYLINDERSCYLINDER, 4110-3071 Standard, handed cast iron cylinder assembly.For various applications see “Table of Sizes” on 4110 Series page 59.

COVERSCOVER, 4110-72 Standard, non-handed plastic cover.

METAL COVER, 4110-72MC Optional, handed cover. Required for plated finishes and custom powder coat finishes.

ARMSEXTRA DUTY ARM, 4110-3077EDA, 4110-3077EDAGNon-handed parallel arm features forged, solid steel main and forearm for potentially abusive installations.Optional 4110-62G thick hub shoe for blade stop clearance.

HOLD-OPEN ARM 4110-3049EDAOptional handed arm provides hold-open function, adjustable at shoe.

FUSIBLE LINK ARM, 4110-3049FL Optional, handed arm releases hold-open function adjustable at shoe when exposed to temperatures above 165° F.NOTE: Check local codes before specifing FL arms. NOT A life safety product!

CUSH-N-STOP ARM, 4110-3077CNS Non-handed parallel arm features solid forged steel main arm and forearm with built-in stop in soffit shoe.

72

3077

72MC

3049

3077EDAG

Left Hand Shown

3077CNS

3049FL 62FL

3071

4110 SERIES

ACCE

SSOR

IES

58PHONE 877-671-7011FAX 800-248-1460www.allegion.com/us 2/14

H-CUSH ARM 4110-3049CNSNon-handed arm provides hold-open function with templated stop/hold-open points. Handle controls hold-open function.

SPRING CUSH ARM, 4110-3077SCNSOptional, non-handed parallel arm for abusive applications features solid forged steel main arm and forearm with spring loaded stop in the soffit shoe.

SPRING H-CUSH ARM, 4110-3049SCNSOptional, non-handed parallel arm for abusive applications features solid forged steel main arm and forearm with spring loaded stop in the soffit shoe. Handle controls hold-open function.

INSTALLATION ACCESSORIESPLATE, 4110-18Required for push side mount where top rail is less than 5-1/8˝ (130 mm), measured from the stop. Plate requires minimum 2˝ (51 mm) minimum top rail. Plate also used with CUSH Arm installations.

CUSH SHOE SUPPORT, 4110-30 Provides anchorage for fifth screw used with CUSH arm, where reveal is less than 3-1/16˝ (78 mm).

BLADE STOP SPACER, 4110-61 Lowers parallel arm shoe to clear 1/2˝ (13 mm) blade stop

PA FLUSH PANEL ADAPTER, 4110-419 Provides horizontal mounting surface for CUSH shoe on single rabetted or flush frame.

18

30

3049CNS

3077SCNS

3049SCNS

61

4110 SERIES AC

CESS

ORIE

S

419


* Adjustable Size 1 thru 5

size 3 size 4 size 5 size 6*4111

*4111

EXTERIOR (and VESTIBULE) DOOR WIDTH

28"711mm

30"762mm

36"914mm

42"1067mm

INTERIOR DOOR WIDTH

48"1219mm

28"711mm

34"864mm

38"965mm

48"1219mm

54"1372mm

60"1524mm

4116

4116

size 2 size 3 size 4 size 5 size 6

REDUCED OPENING FORCE 4110 CLOSERSCAUTION ! Any manual door closer, including those certified by BHMA to conform to ANSI Standard A156.4, that is selected, installed and adjusted based on ADA or other reduced opening force requirements may not provide sufficient power to reliably close and latch a door.

Refer to AUTOMATIC OPERATORS section for information on systems that meet reduced opening force requirements without effecting closing power.

MinimumDoor Width

MinimumDoor Width

Indicates recommended range of door width for closer size.

* Adjustable Size 1 thru 5.

TABLE OF SIZES Select closer based on width of door.The spring power of non-sized 4111 cylinder is adjustable from size 1 through size 5 and is shipped set to size 3.Sized 4116 series cylinders 6.Delayed action not available with 4116 cylinderH - CUSH and SPRING H-CUSH arm not available with 4116 cylinder.

HOW-TO-ORDER4110 SERIES CLOSERS1. SELECT CYLINDER SIZE 4111 (adjustable from size 1 to 5) 4116 (DEL, SHCUSH or HCUSH arm not available)2. SPECIFY HAND RH LH3. SELECT FINISH Standard Powder Coat __________

Aluminum, Dark Bronze, Statuary, Light Bronze, Black, Brass.

4110 CLOSER OPTIONSCYLINDER Delayed Action (DEL) (not available with 4116) Advanced Variable Backcheck (AVB)COVER Metal (MC)FINISH Custom Powder Coat (RAL) ___________

(handed metal cover required) Plated Finish, US ______________

(handed metal cover required) SRI primer (use with powder coat finishes only)SPECIFY ARM Hold-Open Extra Duty (HEDA) Fusible Link,165° F (FL) Cush-N-Stop (CUSH) H-Cush-N-Stop (n/a with 4116 cylinder) (HCUSH) Spring Cush (SCUSH) Spring H-Cush (n/a with 4116 cylinder) (SHCUSH) Extra Duty (EDA) H-Extra Duty (HEDA)SCREW PACK TB*, Self-Reaming & Tapping (TBSRT) Wood & Machine Screw (WMS) TB*, Wood & Machine Screw (TBWMS) TORX Machine Screw (TORX) TB* & TORX Machine Screw (TBTRX

* Specify door thickness if other than 1-3/4”.INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES Plate, 4110-18 CUSH Shoe Support, 4110-30 Blade Stop Spacer, 4110-61 PA Flush Panel Adapter, 4110-419SPECIAL TEMPLATE ST- _________

DOOR WIDTH 36" 42" 48"

8.5* lbs. 4111 4111 4111

5.0* lbs. 4111 4111 4111

* Maximum opening force.

Closer will be shipped with: - STANDARD COVER,- FIFTH SCREW SPACER,- EDA ARM,- SELF-REAMING and TAPPING SCREWS

unless options listed below are selected.

4110 SERIES

ORDE

RING

INFO

RMAT

ION


Protection Plates

B14

Pulls

& P

late

sA

Hin

ges

& P

ivot

sC

Flus

h Bo

lts &

Coo

rdin

ator

sD

Latc

hes,

Cat

ches

& B

olts

E Stop

sF

Exte

rior H

ardw

are

GM

isce

llane

ous H

ardw

are

8400 Series Protection Plates • Doorprotectionplatesareavailablein.050”thickbrass,stainless

steel or aluminum; and 1/8” thick high impact polyethylene in clear or black .

• Beveledgeoptions;specifyB4Eforallfouredges. • Mountingscrewpackfurnishedstandard,16screwsperpack.

Optional screw packs are available for TEK or TORK screw heads . Refer to the following chart for ordering .

• SpecifyNMHfornomountingholes.(Notavailableon8402) • SpecifyNMH-Afornomountingholeswithadhesive.(Notavailableon8402) • SpecifyCSforcountersunkmountingholes. • SpecifyERSpreppedwithextrarowofscrews. Kickplate Gasket Tape Tape is recommended when using a

brass plate on a metal door to reduce tarnishing from electrolytic oxidation . One tape pack will cover an the perimeters of a 8” x 34” kickplate . Order 8401 Gasket Tape .

8400 Protection Plate8402 (UL)* Protection Plate*UL mark appears in upper right corner. Factory supplied screws must be used.Number of screw packs required by plate size (specify TEK Screws or TORK screws) .

22”-25” 26”-33” 34”-41” 42”-48”4”-8” 1 1 1 19”-16” 1 1 1 117”-24” 1 1 1 225”-32” 1 1 2 233”-40” 1 2 2 241”-48” 2 2 2 2

Finishes brass 24” x 48” max. sizeUS Number US3 US4 US10 US10B US15 US26 US26D

BHMA 605 606 612 613 619 625 626

Finishes stainless steelUS Number US32 US32D

BHMA 629 630

Finishes aluminumUS Number US28

BHMA 628

Finishes plasticClear and Black

Residential Grade Kickplates available Carded only, finishes PA28, PA3, PA619, PA716, B3, B505, B619, B716


Protection Plates

B18

Pulls

& P

late

sA

Hin

ges

& P

ivot

sC

Flus

h Bo

lts &

Coo

rdin

ator

sD

Latc

hes,

Cat

ches

& B

olts

E Stop

sF

Exte

rior H

ardw

are

GM

isce

llane

ous H

ardw

are

Mop Plates • Protectthebottomofthepullsideofdoorsubjecttocleaning

and mopping procedures . • SizeRanges:4”to6”high,22”to48”wide

Kick Plates • Protectthebottomofthepushsideofdoorssubjectto

scuffing from foot traffic . •Recommendedforalldoorssubjecttonormaluse

(especially doors using a closer) . • SizeRanges:8”to24”high,22”to48”wide

Stretcher Plates • Protectdoorsatspecificareaswhereconsistentcontactis

made by stretchers, service carts or other equipment . • Usuallyappliedtopushsideofdoors. • Specify“B4E”Optionforbevelededges. • SizeRanges:6”to8”high,22”to48”wide

Armor Plates • Protectlowerhalfofdoorsfromabusebyhardcarts,

trucks and rough usage . • Usuallyappliedtopushsideofsingledoorsandbothsides

of double acting doors . • SizeRanges:26”to48”high,22”to48”wide

Ives Architectural hardware productsE12

Wall Bumpers

BPu

lls &

Pla

tes

AH

inge

s &

Piv

ots

CFl

ush

Bolt

s & C

oord

inat

ors

DLa

tche

s, C

atch

es &

Bol

tsE1

2St

ops

FEx

terio

r Har

dwar

eG

Mis

cella

neou

s Har

dwar

e

WS406CVX & WS407CVXMeets ANSI/BHMA 156 .16 L22201 for brass, and L52101 for stainless steel .

WS406CCV & WS407CCVMeets ANSI/BHMA 156 .16 L22251 for brass and and L52251 for stainless steel .

WS406CVX Wall BumpersWS406CCVWS407CVXWS407CCV • Constructedinsturdyyeteconomicalwroughtbaseofbrass

or stainless steel construction . • Featureconcealedtamper-proofmounting. • Shippedfactorypreassembledbackplatetoreduceinstallationcost. • Easyinstallationbyinsertingscrewdriverthroughsmallholeinrubber.

WS406CVX (406) – convex rubber bumper, packed with wood screw and plastic anchor . WS406CCV (406-1/2) – concave rubber bumper, which avoids damage to locks

with projecting buttons, packed with wood screw and plastic anchor . WS407CVX (407) – convex rubber bumper packed with screw and drywall anchor . WS407CCV (407-1/2) – concave rubber bumper which avoids damage to locks with

projecting buttons and is packed with screw and drywall anchor .

DimensionsBase Diameter: 2-1/2”

Base Thickness: 3/8”

Overall Projection: 1”

Finishes brassIves Number US3 US4 US5* US10 US10B US15 US15A** US26 US26D B716**

BHMA 605 606 609* 612 613 619 620 625 626

Finishes stainless steel Ives Number US32D

BHMA 630

* only available on WS407CVX Slim-Pak of 15

** available on WS407CCV or WS407CVX Slim-Pak of 15

Silicone Tube

14425

.312"(7.9)

1"(25.4)

.625"(15.8)

.062"(1.6)

.080"(2.0)

.055"(1.4)

1.00"(25.4)

1.00"(25.4).052"

(1.3)Silicone Tube

.125"(3.2)

2.250"(57.2)

Extruded Aluminum Housing Mill

Closer Bracket

.625"(15.8)

Solid Neoprene

2.625" (66.6)

.250"(6.4)

Series 42A

Head Protection for Closer Bracket or Door Coordinator

#426A Compress-O-Matic®

Molding by others

Series 87

Security sealÑ when installedwith tamper proof fasteners.

240

25

2.50"(63.5)

.088"(2.2)

.750"(19.1)

.062"(1.6)

InterlockingWater ShedExtruded AluminumHousingFinishes: Mill

Extruded Aluminum HousingFinishes: Mill

#6 x .500" (12.7) SMS

Silicone Tube

Top ofDoor

2.125"(54.0)

.916"(23.3)

Adaptors forEnd Caps

.062"(1.6)

1.375"(34.9)

.062"(1.6)

.593"(15.1)

.0625"(1.6)

Bottom ofDoor

INTERLOCKING WATER SHED For Outswinging Doors

Series 148

25

144

141

Option for #142

Closer bracket by door closer manufacturer

.120"(3.0)

.625"(15.8)

1.940"(49.3)

#142A#142D#142G

#11A #11D #11G

Note: A = Aluminum SP = Steel Primed D = Dr. Bronze Anodized B =BronzeG = Simulated Bronze Anodized

Gasketing Protection for CloserBracket or Door Coordinator

1.50"(38.1)

.187"(4.7)

.250" (6.4)

Neoprene

Meeting StileOne Door Active.

#429A

Rain Drip

Head and Jamb Protection

.125"(3.2)

2.250"(57.2)

Extruded Aluminum Housing Mill

Closer Bracket

.625"(15.8)

Solid Neoprene

2.625" (66.6)

.250"(6.4)

Head Protection for Closer Bracket or Door Coordinator

#428A Compress-O-Matic®

#328CPBSteel - Prime Painted(6Ó wide)

Strike PlateMountingBracket or Door Closer Bracket (Steel Prime)(6" (152.4) long)

Strike Plate(by exit device mfg.)

Door

170,770,7770

.157" (4.0) thick

1.250" (31.8)

#770SPB

Available full width for use with door coordinator (optional).

33

Head/Jam

b

NEW

Solid Neoprene

#8x1.00"(25.4) SMS

Solid Neoprene

#6x.500"(12.7) SMS

Pile with Fin Seal

#6x.500"(12.7)SMS

VinylMagnet

Snap-on Cover( tamper-proof )

#6x.500"(12.7)SMS

Extruded Aluminum Housing is flush with lead edge of door

Vinyl

Magnetic Insert

#6x.500"(12.7)SMS

Brush Astragal

Extruded Neoprene

#6x.500"(12.7)SMS

#6x.500"(12.7)SMS

Self-Extinguishing Silicone

Solid Neoprene

#6x.500"(12.7) SMS

Pile with Fin Seal

#8x1.00"(25.4) SMS

Unit has adjusting screws approx.10" on center

Adjusting Screw

Unit has adjusting screws approx.10" on center

Internal Springself-adjusting

#8x1.00"(25.4) SMS

.875"(22.2)

.500"(12.7)

1.00"(25.4)

1.00"(25.4)

.072"(1.8)

.656"(16.7)

.320"(8.1)min

.406"(10.3)

1.00"(25.4)

1.00"(25.4)

.094" (2.4)

1.00"(25.4)

.395"(10.0)

.395"(10.0)

.395"(10.0)

.629"(16.0)

.984"(25.0)

.219" (5.6)

.500"(12.7)

.875"(22.2)

.500"(12.7)

.875"(22.2)

.219"(5.6)

Adjusting Screw

Note: A = Aluminum AA = Clear Anodized B = Bronze D = Dr. Bronze AnodizedG = Gold Anodized Meeting Stiles - Both Doors Active

Self-Extinguishing Silicone

PRODUCT CATALOG #90 | PAGE 36 | WWW.ZEROINTERNATIONAL.COM

1.875"(47.6)

Polypropylene Pile

.075"(1.8)

11°1.125"

(28.6

#96A

.250" (6.4)

.500" (12.7)

.075" (1.9)

#6 x .500" (12.7) SMS

Neoprene Lip

Note: A = Aluminum D = Dr. Bronze AnodizedB = Bronze G = Simulated Bronze AnodizedBk = Black Anodized AA = Anodized AluminumSill Protection Sweep

.200"(5.1)

Solid Neoprene

.070"(1.8)

.125"(3.2) x1.375"(34.9)

1.250"(31.8)

.500"(12.7)

#6 X .500"(12.7) SMS

.200"(5.1)

SolidNeoprene

.070"(1.8)

.125"(3.2) x2.00"(50.8)

1.250"(31.8)

1.125"(28.6)

#6 X .500"(12.7) SMS

.094"(2.4)

SolidNeoprene

.220"(5.6)

.125"(3.2) x

#6 X .500"(12.7) SMS

1.375"(34.9)

1.00"(25.4)

.750"(19.1)

.220"(5.6)

SolidNeoprene

.094"(2.4)

1.00"(25.4)

.125" (3.2) x2.00"(50.8)

#6 X .500"(12.7) SMS

1.500"(38.1)

1.00"(25.4).094"

(2.4)

SolidNeoprene

#6 x .500"(12.7) SMS

.250"(6.4)

1.00"(25.4)

#6 x .500"(12.7) SMS

.094"(2.4)

.375"(9.5)

ExtrudedBeveledNeoprene.125"(3.2) x1.00"(25.4)

Spring

#6 x .500"(12.7) SMSAdjustingScrew

.250" (6.4)

Pile with Fin Seal

.500"(12.7)

.075"(1.9)

1.019"(25.9)

11°

#6 x .500"(12.7) SMS

Pile with Fin Seal

.390"(10.0)

.881"(22.4)

Neoprene Lip

Snap-onCover

EndCap

.500"(12.7)

#39A#39D #39WA

#39WD

#339AA#339B#339G#339D

#339WAA#339WB#339WG#339WD

#329AA#329B#329G#329D

#50MA

#328AA#328B#328G#328D

#255AA#255D

#98A#98D

#100A #100D

#477AA#477D

.094"(2.4)

ExtrudedBeveledNeoprene.125"(3.2) x1.00"(25.4)

.220"(5.6)

#6 X .500"(12.7) SMS

1.00"(25.4)

.500"(12.7)

1.375"(34.9)

.375"(9.5)

Nylon Brush

1.00"(25.4)

.625"(15.8)

.290"(7.4)

Nylon Brush

#8192A#8192D

#8198A#8198D#8198G

1.00"(25.4)

#6 x .750" (19.1) SMS

.094"(2.4)

.687"(17.5)

SolidNeoprene

.250"(6.4)

#539AA#539D

Neoprene Lip

.582"(14.8)

.375" (9.5)

#8194AA

Nylon Brush

.582"(14.8)

.375" (9.5)

#8193AA

27

Door Sweeps

NEWNEW

1.440"(36.6)

5.625"(142.9)

.135"(3.4)

5.00"(127.0)

.500"(12.7)

.200"(5.1)

6.00"(152.4)

.500"(12.7)

5.00"(127.0)

.200"(5.1)

.115"(2.9)

.135"(3.4)

5.00" (127.0)

2.940"(74.7)

.135"(3.4)

.135"(3.4)

5.625"(142.9)

1.440"(36.6)

6.00"(152.4)

.500"(12.7)

.500"(12.7)

.500"(12.7)

.500"(12.7)

.500"(12.7)

#724A

#655A #655B

#656A #656B

#8655A

#625A Thermal Break

Thermal Break#626A

#8724A

PVC Break

PVC Break

Thermal Break

Thermal Break

PVC Break

PVC Break

OAK

Utility Thresholds

.187"(4.7)

.070"(1.8 )

ZERO Saddles.When nothing elseis good enoughfor long enough

Which would you ratherwalk on or install?

Both pass the ANSI standard load test, but theZERO threshold also passes the test of time and weight. The heavier-gauge material in our thresholdallows you to drill and screw right through and into concrete. Lighter-gauge thresholds can buckle and often loosen because screws cannot be tightened fully. Be sure you get the best....specify the heavier gauge when you need thresholds.

Thresholds

Note: A= Aluminum B= BronzeThresholds can be ordered with E (Epoxy) or V3 (Full Body Strength) options.

PRODUCT CATALOG #80 | PAGE 5 | WWW.ZEROINTERNATIONAL.COM


Viewers

BPulls &

PlatesA

Hinges &

PivotsC


DLatches, Catches &

BoltsEStops

F5

Exterior Hardw

areG

Miscellaneous H

ardware

U696 One-Way Viewer • 150°AngleofView. • Fordoors1-3/8"to2-1/16"thick. • Secure,tamper-resistant. • Solidbrassbody;glasslens. • Simpleinstallation—onlya1/2"holerequired. • Suggestedinstallationheight:60"fromfloor. • Trimwasheravailable,3/4"x.032"thick.

698U698 One-Way Wide Angle Viewer • 190°AngleofView. • Lensprojects1/4"fromfaceofdoor. • 4opticalglasslenses. • Fordoors1-3/8"to2-1/8"thick. • Solidbrassbodyandbarrel. • Simpleinstallation—onlya9/16"holerequired. • Suggestedinstallationheight:60"fromfloor.

Meets ANSI/BHMA A156 .16 L23222

UL Listed 90 minute fire doors

FinishesIves Number B4 B10B B26D

BHMA 606 613 626

FinishesIves Number B3 B15** B26D B716*

BHMA 605 619 626

* not available on U698** only available in Schlage Carded

698 meets ANSI/BHMA A156 .16 L23172

U698 meets ANSI/BHMA A156 .16 L23222

U698 is UL Listed 90 minute fire doors

Ives Architectural hardware productsG4

Hooks

BPu

lls &

Pla

tes

AH

inge

s &

Piv

ots

CFl

ush

Bolt

s & C

oord

inat

ors

DLa

tche

s, C

atch

es &

Bol

tsE Stop

sF

Exte

rior H

ardw

are

G4M

isce

llane

ous H

ardw

are

574 Coat & Hat Hook • Decorativedesignisidealforcommercialandresidentialinstallations. • Madefromcastbrass,castaluminumorepoxy-coatedaluminum.

DimensionsBase: 1-5/8" High x 1-3/4" WideProjection: 3-3/4"Overall Height, Brass: 4-3/4"Overall Height, Aluminum: 5"

575 Coat & Hat Hook • Especiallydesignedtoaccommodatelargehats. • Madefromsolidbrassorcastaluminum.

DimensionsBase: 2-1/4" High x 1-3/8" WideProjection: 3-5/8"Overall Height: 5-3/4"

Meets ANSI/BHMA A156 .16 L13113 forbrass and L33113 for aluminum

Meets ANSI/BHMA A156 .16 L33121

Finishes brass Ives Number B3 B4 B10 B10B B15 B26 B26D

BHMA 605 606 612 613 619 625 626

Finishes aluminum Ives Number A3 A26 A92

BHMA 666 672 673

Finishes aluminum Ives Number A3 A10B A92

BHMA 666 703 673

580 Ceiling Hook • Idealforuseinclosets,attachedtoundersideofshelves,

or in storage lockers . • Madefromcastbrassorcastaluminum.

DimensionsBase: 1" High x 1-7/8" WideProjection: 2-1/4"

Finishes Ives Number A3 A5 A10 A14 A15 A92 A716

BHMA 666 668 669 670 673

Ives Architectural hardware productsG5

Hooks

BPulls &

PlatesA

Hinges &

PivotsC


DLatches, Catches &

BoltsEStops

FExterior H

ardware

G5

Miscellaneous H

ardware

581 Wardrobe Hook • Compacthookisperfectwherespaceislimited,

such as behind doors where low profile is needed . • Madefromcastbrass,castaluminumorepoxy-coatedaluminum.

DimensionsBase, Brass/Aluminum: 1-1/4" High x 1-1/4" WideBase, Zinc: 1-1/2" High x 3/4" WideProjection, Brass: 1-11/16"Projection, Aluminum, Zinc: 1-5/8"

582 Double Wardrobe Hook • Compactdoublehookisperfectwherespaceislimited,

such as behind doors where low profile is needed . • Madefromcastbrass,castaluminumorepoxy-coatedaluminum.

DimensionsBase, Brass: 1-1/8" High x 1-1/4" WideBase, Aluminum: 1-1/16" High x 1-3/16 WideBase, Zinc: 1-5/8" High x 7/8" WideProjection, Brass: 1"Projection, Aluminum, Zinc: 1-3/32"

Finishes brass Ives Number B3 B4 B5 B10 B10B B15 B15A* B26 B26D B716

BHMA 605 606 609 612 613 619 620 625 626 * only available in Schlage Carded

Finishes aluminum Ives Number A3 A5 A14 A15 A92 A716 A-BLK A-W

BHMA 666 669 670 673

Finishes zinc (narrow base) Ives Number Z619E

BHMA

Finishes zinc (narrow base) Ives Number Z619E

BHMA

Finishes brassIves Number B3 B4 B5 B10 B10B B15 B15A* B26 B26D B716

BHMA 605 606 609 612 613 619 620 625 626

Finishes aluminumIves Number A3 A5 A10 A14 A15 A92 A716 A-W A-BLK

BHMA 666 668 669 670 673

* only available in Schlage Carded or Slim-Pak of 25




GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified

in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Doors.

2. Windows.

3. Storefront framing.

4. Glazed entrances.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 01 Section "Alternates" for Alternates affecting the Work described in this Section.

B. Division 08 Section “Glazing Surface Films” for surface film applied to glazing.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and

impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to

the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets

to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in

construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to

ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.




GLAZING 088000 - 2

3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass

to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.

4. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass

deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1

inch, whichever is less.

5. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential

shading within individual glass lites.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.


A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape

sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility

with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current

sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.

2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation

techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass,

tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates,

shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12

inches square.

1. Coated glass.

2. Insulating glass.

C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets sealants, in 12-inch lengths.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use

same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and

design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer

responsible for their preparation.




GLAZING 088000 - 3


A. Qualification Data: For installers; manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated,

low-e coatings; glass testing agency; and sealant testing agency.

B. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, for coated glass insulating glass, glazing sealants, and glazing gaskets.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations

within previous 36-month period.

D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings:

A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who

are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited

according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain tinted float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass, and

insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single

manufacturer for each product and installation method.

G. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Where glazing products are used in fire-rated assemblies, comply with

requirements of specific assembly specified in other sections of these Specifications.

1. Door Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,

based on testing according to NFPA 252.

2. Window Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing

and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings

indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.

H. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and

ANSI Z97.1.




GLAZING 088000 - 4

I. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers

and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these

publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's

"Glazing Manual."

2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

J. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing

with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,

thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

K. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least

one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

L. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Section 014339 “Mockups” to match glazing

systems required for Project, including glazing methods.

M. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to

glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or

other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing

units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate

temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when

glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are

outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in

which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within




GLAZING 088000 - 5

specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from

normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass

contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other

indications of deterioration in coating.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which

laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within

specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed

from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning

laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge

separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding

those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which

insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within

specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal

under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning

insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the

obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in

thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated

throughout Project.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated

float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance

Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-

treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance

Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated

float glass.

C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes protection testing

requirements in ASTM E 1996 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall

be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be

installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project.

1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade.

2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 feet above grade.




GLAZING 088000 - 6

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties

specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated

below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick.

2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.

3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite.

4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise

indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.

3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).

C. Acid-etched glass with decorative pattern etched into glass with hydrofluoric and hydrochloric

acids, evenly applied, according to manufacturer's standard process.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

SatinDecoTM by Guardian Industries Corporation or comparable product by one of the

following:

a. Garidbaldi Glass.

b. S.A. Bendheim, Ltd.; SatinTech.

c. Sevasa-USA; Satenglas.

d. Walker Glass, Inc.

e. Glass Type: Clear fully tempered float glass.

f. Glass Thickness: 6 mm.

2.3 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with

testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, with "Windborne-Debris-Impact

Resistance" Paragraph in "Glass Products, General" Article, and with other requirements




GLAZING 088000 - 7

specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose

physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with one of the following to comply with interlayer

manufacturer's written recommendations:

a. Polyvinyl butyral interlayer.

b. Polyvinyl butyral interlayers reinforced with polyethylene terephthalate film.

c. Ionoplast interlayer.

d. Cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer.

e. Cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer reinforced with polyethylene

terephthalate film.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to

comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by

designations in "Laminated-Glass Types" Article.

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by

a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other

requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary.

2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article and in "Laminated

Glass" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article and in

"Insulating-Laminated-Glass Types" Article.

2.5 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to

maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.

2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.

3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM, silicone,

or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of

profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.




GLAZING 088000 - 8

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense

compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of

pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames

with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.

2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with

other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,

and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as

demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at

time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.

b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.

c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290.

d. Pecora Corporation; 890.

e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990.

f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.

2.7 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric

tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer

rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and

complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure.

3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive

on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:




GLAZING 088000 - 9

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with

a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing

standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application

indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and

density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant

performance.

2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face

clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product

manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance

requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges

with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.10 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type CFG: Clear float glass.

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.

B. Glass Type TFG: Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 6.0 mm.

2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

C. Glass Type G3: Clear fully tempered tinted float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 6.0 mm.




GLAZING 088000 - 10


3. Tint and Glazing Performance: “Guardian Green” by Guardian or equal.

4. Surface Film: As specified in section 088700 “Glazing Surface Films”.

2.11 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type G1: Low-e-coated, clear insulating laminated glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-inch.

2. Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 6.0 mm.

3. Outdoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass.

4. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second surface.

a. Basis of Design: Guardian SunGuard SuperNeutral 68/28.

5. Interspace Content: Air.

6. Indoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of heat-strengthened float glass.

a. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6.0 mm.

b. Interlayer Thickness: To meet performance requirements.

c. Interlayer Color: Clear.

7. Performance Requirements:

a. Visible Light Transmittance: 68 percent minimum.

b. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 minimum.

c. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.28 maximum.

d. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.28 maximum.


B. Glass Type G2: Low-e-coated, clear tempered insulating laminated glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1- inch.

2. Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 6.0 mm.

3. Outdoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass.

4. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second surface.

a. Basis of Design: Guardian SunGuard SuperNeutral 68/28.

5. Interspace Content: Air.

6. Indoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of heat-strengthened float glass.

a. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6.0 mm.

b. Interlayer Thickness: To meet performance requirements.

c. Interlayer Color: Clear.

7. Performance Requirements:




GLAZING 088000 - 11

a. Visible Light Transmittance: 68 percent minimum.

b. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 minimum.

c. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.28 maximum.

d. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.28 maximum.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the

following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and

offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.

3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.

Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so

that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave

visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and

other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to

provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant

thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from

Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or

other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and

appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by

preconstruction testing.




GLAZING 088000 - 12

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of

compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and

glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances

and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant

width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of

tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways

in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to

requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket

on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is

subjected to movement.

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by

gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with

sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush

with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to

make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover

horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.

Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.




GLAZING 088000 - 13

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense

compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.

Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place

with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and

press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and

installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners

and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without

developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket

manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and

press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-

glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to

produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints

with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass

lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding

into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and

backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance

for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond

of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING

A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide

supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.




GLAZING 088000 - 14


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers

to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove

nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with

glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at

frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,

alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from

natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date

scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as

recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.



GLAZING SURFACE FILMS 088700 - 1

SECTION 088700 - GLAZING SURFACE FILMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the decorative film overlays for interior applications:


A. Product Data: For each decorative-glass and glazing product indicated.

B. Samples: For the following products, 12 inches square:

1. Each pattern of film applied to clear glass.

C. Product Schedule: For decorative glass films overlay. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of decorative film overlay to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.



A. Protect decorative glass film overlays materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install decorative glass film overlays until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of glass lites by field measurements.


GLAZING SURFACE FILMS 088700 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Decorative Film Overlay. Use translucent, dimensionally stable, cast PVC film, 2-mil- minimum thickness, with pressure-sensitive, clear adhesive back for adhering to glass and releasable protective backing.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 3M “Dusted Crystal-7725Se-314” or comparable product by one of the following: a. Avery Dennison, Graphics. b. FDC Graphic Films, Inc.. c. 3M.

2. Use: Suitable for interior applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean glass immediately before application of glazing film overlay.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Decorative Film Overlay: Apply squarely aligned to glass edges, uniformly smooth, and free from tears, air bubbles, wrinkles, and rough edges, in single sheet completely overlaying the back face of clean glass, according to manufacturer's written instructions, including surface preparation and application temperature limitations.


A. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass film overlay, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass film overlay manufacturer.



LOUVERS 089000 - 1

SECTION 089000 - LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum exterior louvers.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for penetration and barrier flashings required at exterior openings in gypsum sheathing wall assemblies.

2. Section 072726 "Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers" for penetration and barrier flashings required at exterior openings in concrete masonry unit wall assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal.


A. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects.


C. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.


LOUVERS 089000 - 2



B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion.

2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

C. Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with louver manufacturer and curtain wall manufacturer to provide weathertight installation of louvers installed in curtain wall system.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.


LOUVERS 089000 - 3

C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis of design indicated or comparable products by one of the following:

1. Airolite Company, LLC (The) 2. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.; a Mestek company 3. Architectural Louvers 4. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. 5. Construction Specialties, Inc. 6. Greenheck Fan Corporation 7. Industrial Louvers, Inc. 8. Nystrom Building Products 9. Reliable Products, Inc. 10. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. 11. United Enertech Corporation

2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM EXTERIOR LOUVERS

A. Horizontal, Drainable Louver:

1. Basis of Design: Ruskin Company; ELF6375DX 2. Louver Depth: 6 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: As required to comply with structural performance

requirements, but not less than 0.080 inch for blades and 0.080 inch for frames. 4. Mullion Type: Exposed. 5. Performance Requirements:

a. Free Area: Not less than 57.0 sq. ft. for 48-inch wide by 48-inch high louver. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1000 fpm. c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.15-inch wg static pressure drop at 1000 fpm

free-area velocity.

6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2.4 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen on the interior face of each exterior louver.

B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.

C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.

1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached.


LOUVERS 089000 - 4

2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. 3. Type: Non-rewirable, U-shaped frames.

D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1. Bird Screening: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 3/4 by 0.050 inch thick.


A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.

1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern unless horizontal mullions are indicated.

2. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints where indicated.

C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.

E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less.

1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where width of panel requires additional vertical support, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.

2. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction.

G. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers.

H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.


LOUVERS 089000 - 5




A. Finish louvers after assembly.

B. High-Performance Organic Mica Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended mica flakes complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

F. Protect unpainted nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.


LOUVERS 089000 - 6

G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Grid suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits.


1. Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall joint systems installed with non-load-bearing steel framing.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for gypsum panels.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Indicate yield strength of steel, section properties, limiting heights and spans.


A. Evaluation Reports: For dimpled steel studs and runners and firestop tracks, from ICC-ES.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Structural Properties: Manufacturer's published data on Structural Properties are calculated based on allowable stress design conforming to AISI "Specification of the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Conventional Steel Framing: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Allsteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. 2. Craco Manufacturing Inc. 3. Southeastern Stud and Components 4. Steel Construction Systems 5. The Formetal Co. Inc. 6. The Steel Network 7. Steelform USA

B. Dimpled Studs: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ClarkDietrich; ProStud 20 and ProStud 22. 2. MarinoWARE; Viper 20S. 3. Telling Industries; Viper 20S.

2.2 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Steel having a yield strength greater than 33 KSI is permitted.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized.

a. Equivalent coatings are not acceptable and not allowed.

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Minimum 0.0312 inch (20 gauge) unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, or greater as indicated in the manufacturer's published performance data based on the following criteria:

a. Yield Strength of steel. b. Deflection Limits:

1) Gypsum Wallboard: L/240.

c. Limiting Heights: As indicated on Drawings. d. Spans: As indicated on Drawings or as recommended by manufacturer. e. Applied loads:

1) Gypsum wallboard: 10 psf.

f. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.



2. Minimum base-metal thickness may be reduced if yield strength of steel is greater than 33 KSI. Minimum base-metal thickness for dimpled steel studs and runners is 0.179 inch. Dimpled steel studs and runners must comply with requirements above.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Provide one of the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

C. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. 2. Backing Plates (Contractor's Option): In lieu of flat steel straps, provide ClarkDietrich

Danback fire-retardant treated flexible wood backing plates system for the attachment of cabinets, handrails, and wall fixtures.

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches or as indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch thick, galvanized steel.

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges.

1. Depth: 3/4 inches or as indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-

steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch diameter wire.



2.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing:

1. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.

2. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

a. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency.

1) Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.

b. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.

4. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch, a minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange, and in depth indicated.

5. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

a. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.

1) Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch or as required.

B. Contractor's Option - Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.


a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. Space studs as indicated on Drawings.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.



b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

D. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,

or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.



4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts

that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls. 2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and

suspension systems that support gypsum board.




A. Source Limitations: Provide gypsum products manufactured within the United States from materials free of sulfur, formaldehyde or other deleterious chemicals. Natural gypsum ore shall be mined in North America. Synthetic (by-product) gypsum shall be pure calcium sulfate from domestic sources.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory".

C. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

D. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 16 ft. wide by full height of ceiling to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install mockups for each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.



3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELS, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


a. American Gypsum. b. Certainteed Corporation c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company f. Temple-Inland Inc. g. USG Corporation.

B. Type X:



1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. 3. Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use at exposed

terminations of gypsum board panels. d. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

D. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot-grouting hollow metal door frames.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.



B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

2. Provide sound attenuation blankets free of formaldehyde.

E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine weathertight building enclosure, with Installer present, and verify that delivery, storage, and installation of gypsum panel products will not be affected by exposure to moisture beyond limits recommended by manufacturer.

C. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered



edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

F. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

G. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch wide joints to install sealant.

H. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

I. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

K. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.

1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.

L. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.



B. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, or, if not shown, according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:

1. Level 0: This level of finish shall be used in temporary construction only. No taping, finishing, or accessories required unless indicated or specified as in dust proof partitions.



2. Level 1: This level shall be used in ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. Embed tape at joints.

3. Level 4: This level of finish shall be used for areas to receive smooth paint finish. Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces.

a. Tape joints require joint compound and feathering of joint to a minimum of 12 inches each side of joint.

b. Tape joints that are visible through finished walls are not acceptable.


A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation.

2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board ceilings:

a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation. b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems. c. Installation of air-duct systems. d. Installation of air devices. e. Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing. f. Installation of ceiling support framing. g. Installation of through-penetration firestopping and fire-resistant joint sealants,

with identification labels.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Acoustical panels, 2. Exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.

B. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.



B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Acoustical Panel: 6-inch square sample of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long

Samples of each type, finish, and color.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension system members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings. 4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot. 5. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 6. Field quality-control test reports.



B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components and anchor and fastener type.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of ceiling panel and suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements:

1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

D. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following:

1. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies--Seismic Zones 3 & 4."

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they



will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 5 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2

percent of quantity installed. 3. Seismic Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis of design indicated or comparable products by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.



B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

C. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21, where indicated.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Acoustical Ceiling (ACT-1): Provide acoustical panels complying with the following:

1. Basis of Design: Armstrong; Fine Fissured, 1714 2. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for the following:

a. Type III; mineral base with painted finish. b. Form: 2, water felted. c. Pattern: C E (perforated, small holes and lightly textured) .

3. Color: White. 4. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 0.85. 5. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.70. 6. Edge Detail: Square, lay-in. 7. Thickness: 3/4- inch. 8. Size: 24 by 48 inches.

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400.



4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.

E. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.

1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.

2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

F. Extruded-Aluminum Wall Angle, Edge Moldings, and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum wall, angle, edge moldings, and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements and the following:

1. Aluminum Alloy: 6063-T5. 2. Color: Factory finished to match ceiling grid. 3. For sprinkler heads and other penetrations, provide 2-inch oversized ring or sleeve

through the ceiling to allow for free movement of at least 1 inch in all horizontal directions.

4. Wall Angle: 7/8-inch wide, approved for use in seismic areas.

a. Armstrong; Seismic RX with BERC2 Clips. b. USG; DX main and cross runners with ACM7 clips.

G. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in-place.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Basis of Design: Armstrong; Prelude Plus 2. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 3. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. 4. Face Design: Flat, flush. 5. Cap Material: Aluminum. 6. Cap Finish: Painted white.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant, complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing



airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.



5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from

hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.

10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

11. Install hanger wire as specified above within 6 inches of each corner of the grid at every light, air diffuser, air return grill, and other equipment items which are installed within or penetrate the ceiling system.

C. Where area of ceiling exceeds 2500 square feet provide seismic separation joints as indicated, or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Install wall angle, edge moldings, and trim in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

a. Install seismic wall angle in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations and with all accessories necessary to comply with ICC Report.

2. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

3. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

4. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels in a basket-weave pattern. 2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of

suspension system runners and moldings. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of

reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install

panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.



5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

6. Install seismic clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

7. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



FIBER-CEMENT CEILINGS 095428 - 1

SECTION 095428 - FIBER-CEMENT CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fiber-cement ceiling, exterior.


A. Delegated Design: Design fiber-cement ceiling assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated, and in accordance with requirements indicated by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Structural Performance: Provide fiber-cement ceiling assemblies capable of withstanding the effects the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind

pressures: a. Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings.



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate penetrations and ceiling mounted items.

C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Fiber-cement panel: Set of 12-inch samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Framing system members. 2. Method of attaching to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures and special moldings. 4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot. 5. Qualification Data: For testing agency.



B. Product Certification: Manufacturer’s certifications that products comply with specified requirements and governing codes including product data, laboratory test reports and research reports showing compliance with authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of product, including related accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of ceiling panel system through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Provide mock up to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups as shown and to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. 1. Size: 10 LF. 2. Locate mockups in the locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect. 3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before proceeding with fiber-cement ceiling

installation. 4. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial

Completion may become part of the completed Work.

C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Structural Criteria: Install and certify system to comply with structural and wind load

requirements of governing codes.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Deliver fiber-cement panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages.

B. Handle components to prevent damage to surfaces and edges, and to prevent distortion and other physical damage.

1.9 MAINTENANCE & EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Maintenance Instructions: Provide manufacturers standard maintenance and cleaning instructions for finishes provided.



B. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fiber-cement Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including cracking and deforming. b. Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIBER-CEMENT CEILING PANELS AND PLANKS

A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Basis of Design

indicated or an Architect approved comparable product by one of the following: a. Allura; a Plycem company b. GAF Materials Corporation c. James Hardie Building Products, Inc. (Basis-of-Design) d. Nichiha Fiber Cement

B. Vented Fiber Cement Soffit Panel: 1. Basis of Design: “Vented Cedarmill” by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. 2. Thickness: 1/4-inch 3. Width: 12-inches and 24-inches, as shown on Drawings.

C. Fiber Cement Plank: 1. Basis of Design: “Batten Board Rustic Grain” by James Hardie Building Products,

Inc. 2. Thickness: 1/4-inch. 3. Width: 3-1/2 inches by 12 ft.

D. Finish: Shop primed, field-painted. All exposed sides.

E. Texture: Wood grain.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Fiber-Cement Product Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.



1. Provide accessories matching texture of adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer and tested and approved for project wind zone.

C. Fiber-cement Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant, complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which panel ceilings and soffits attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of products specified in this section.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of fiber-cement panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install according to manufacturers written recommendations and authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of ceiling area and

where necessary to conceal edges of panels. 2. Apply fiber-cement sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs

of moldings before they are installed. 3. Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut units for accurate fit at

borders and around construction penetrating ceiling. 4. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not

more than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 5. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces including trim. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace components that



cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.



B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size samples, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain resilient stair treads and accessories, and rubber floor tile by a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

C. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.



C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. 3. Johnsonite 4. Mannington Commercial 5. Roppe Corporation, USA

2.2 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (vulcanized thermoset rubber) or Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogenous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe).

B. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.

C. Height: 6 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

D. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length, but not less than 96 feet.

E. Outside and Inside Corners: Preformed.

F. Colors, Finish, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with

installation only after substrates pass testing.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. No lengths shall be shorter than 4’ unless it is to match wall length.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.



G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Rubber Floor Tile:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. 2. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor

offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. 3. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and door

frames. 4. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. 5. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to

substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.



RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl composition floor tile.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches long, of each color required.

D. Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 20 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.


A. Mockups: Initial installation shall serve as mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for floor tile including resilient base and accessories. a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations indicated.






A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

B. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification.

2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE (VCT-1)

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Finish Legend or comparable product by one of the following:

1. AB; American Biltrite. 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 3. Congoleum Corporation. 4. Johnsonite. (Basis of Design) 5. Mannington Mills, Inc.



B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches.

F. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content: a. Vinyl Composition Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L or less.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.



3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.

Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.



H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s).

E. Joint Sealant: Apply sealant to resilient terrazzo floor tile perimeter and around columns, at door frames, and at other joints and penetrations.

F. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.



EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates:

1. Fiber-cement siding.

2. Galvanized metal.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Levels: ASTM D 523

1. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees.

2. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees.

3. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees.

4. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees.

5. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees.

6. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees.

7. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees.



B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.




A. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

B. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.




A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior:

1. Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Block Sealer.

2.3 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based:


a. Benjamin Moore; Super Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer, P04 b. PPG; Pitt-Tech Plus, 100% Acrylic DTM Industrial Primer, Z6631 c. Sherwin-Williams; Protective & Marine DTM Acrylic Primer/Finisher, B66W1

2.4 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Exterior, Low-Sheen (Gloss Level 3-4):


a. Benjamin Moore; Super Spec Ext. 100% Acrylic Satin Finish, 184 b. PPG; Speedhide Exterior 100% Acrylic Latex Satin, 6-2045XI Line c. Sherwin-Williams; Emerald Exterior Acrylic Latex Gloss, K48W00051

B. Latex, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5):


a. Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec Waterborne Exterior, N449 b. PPG; Speedhide Exterior 100% Acrylic, 6-900XI Line c. Sherwin-Williams; Emerald Exterior Acrylic Latex Gloss, K49W00051


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If



paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

C. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.



3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.

3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames.

4. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.



3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. CMU Substrates (Contractors Option: for air barrier surface preparation):

1. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior.

B. Fiber Cement Board Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (low sheen).

C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex Over Water-Based Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex exterior coating matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior semigloss.



SIGNAGE 101400 - 1

SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Panel signs, as required by code.


1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."


A. Product Data: For each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.

1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and lettering layout.

C. Samples: Provide samples of each sign component for verification of compliance with requirements indicated.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer.


SIGNAGE 101400 - 2

B. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work.

C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1.

E. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with ADA Accessibility Guidelines. Machine-cut copy characters from opaque acrylic sheet and chemically weld onto the acrylic sign panel face or use photopolymer process, or computer guided sandblasting, rotary or laser engraving process to produce raised copy and Braille tags. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.


A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of polymer finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of graphic image, colors, and sign lamination.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL SIGNS


1. APCO Graphics, Inc. 2. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 3. Avalis Wayfinding Solutions Inc. 4. Best Manufacturing Company 5. Gemini Incorporated 6. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 7. InPro Corporation


SIGNAGE 101400 - 3

8. Mohawk Sign Systems 9. Poblocki Sign Company 10. Supersine Company

B. General: Provide signs as indicated on Drawings, or as required by code, including but not limited to, toilet rooms, stairs, elevators, exits, electrical rooms, and assembly spaces.

1. Provide graphics and Braille as required by code. 2. Fabricate panel signs to comply with the requirements indicated for materials,

thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes and details of construction. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed condition within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.

C. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate unframed panel signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform with the following requirements:

1. Edge Condition: Beveled. 2. Corner Condition: Provide corners rounded to 1/2 inch radius. 3. Signs: Nominal 3/16 inch thick, plastic or phenolic, with the following:

a. Raised characters, 1/32 inch minimum, at least 5/8 inch high; b. Raised numbers, 1/32 inch minimum, at least 1 inch high numbers; c. Raised Braille, 1/32 inch minimum; d. Signs shall be etched and have raised integral symbols and letters. Applied

symbols and letters are not acceptable. e. Each room sign shall list the room number and a room identification name in both

Braille and in the characters and numbers described above.

4. Provide minimum 8 by 8 inch size, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or as needed to meet requirements.

5. Exterior Signs: Provide fiberglass units for exterior applications. 6. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide opaque sheet matching sign material and finish onto

opposite side of glass to conceal back of sign.

a. Color: Color matching sign or black. Confirm final color selection with Architect.

7. Copy for each sign shall be provided during the Construction Phase of the project. 8. Handicapped Symbols: Provide one combination handicapped symbol, male and female

caricatures, and room identification sign for every room where handicapped facilities are provided, such as toilet rooms.

9. Color: Color for background and letter colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with adhesive on both sides.

B. Adhesives: As recommended by sign manufacturer.

C. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface.


SIGNAGE 101400 - 4

D. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

2.3 FINISHES

A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide colors as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range.

B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and applications recommendations.

C. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.

1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, are sized and located to accommodate signs.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below:

1. Interior Signage: Manufacturer's standard two-face tape and silicone-adhesive mounting, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to


SIGNAGE 101400 - 5

prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.

2. Install signage in accordance with approved shop drawings, ADA requirements, and at locations indicated on the Drawings and in conformance with manufacturer’s instructions using only approved materials and methods.


A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.



TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Custodial accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work

and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.

C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.



B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Basis-of-Design products as scheduled on Drawings, or comparable products approved by Architect, by one of the following:

1. Toilet Accessories: a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. b. American Specialties, Inc. c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. d. Bradley Corporation.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.

C. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

D. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

E. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.

B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.

C. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless-steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.

D. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated.

C. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.



FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400 - 1

SECTION 104400 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers. 3. Wall mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties.

1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods,

relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. 2. Provide fire extinguishers in elevator mechanical/control rooms that comply with code

requirements.

C. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.



B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

C. Provide fire rated cabinets where indicated to be installed in fire rated walls.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets:

a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. d. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group e. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. f. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. g. Potter-Roemer LLC

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

C. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other locations indicated.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, in enameled-steel container.



2.4 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated and fire rated.

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.

D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.

1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.

F. Door Material: Steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet, clear transparent.

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide projecting lever handle with cam-action latch. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

J. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Decals or Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

K. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat finish.

L. Fabrication:



1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

a. Weld joints and grind smooth. b. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

2. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

a. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

b. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

3. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

2.5 WALL MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.



B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning".

B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets are to be installed.

B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties.

B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to structure and cabinets, square and plumb. 3. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

D. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



FABRIC AWNINGS AND CANOPIES 107313 - 1

SECTION 107313 - FABRIC AWNINGS AND CANOPIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed fabric awnings and canopies.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for blocking, shims, reinforcing, and supplemental support members for connecting to awning and canopy frame and anchorage.

2. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for blocking, nailers, shims, reinforcing, framing, and furring for connecting to awning and canopy frame and anchorage.



1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, fabrication details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, fittings, mounting accessories, features, and finishes for awnings and canopies.

2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, mounting heights, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and assembly of awnings and canopies, including seam layout, spacing,

and orientation of awning and canopy fabric. 3. Show locations for blocking, reinforcement, and supplementary structural support.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following:

1. Awning and Canopy Fabric: 12-inch- square section of fabric from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Mark face of fabric.

2. Seam, Edge, and Corner Condition: Not less than 12-inch- long section showing seam, edge, and corner treatment.

3. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches long. 4. Frame Finish: Not less than 6-inch lengths. 5. Frame Corner and Frame Intersections: Not less than 12-inch sections showing finished

joint construction and fabric attachment to awning and canopy frame. 6. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3 inches

square. 7. Accessories: Manufacturer's full-size unit.



D. Product Schedule: For awnings and canopies. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For awnings and canopies.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and professional engineer.


C. Product Certificates: For each type of awning and canopy fabric.

D. Evaluation Reports: For anchors and fasteners, from ICC-ES.

E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For awnings and canopies to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining awning and canopy fabrics and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics,

finishes,


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Fabricator is a Master Fabric Craftsman certified by the Industrial Fabrics Association International.

2. Fabricator's responsibilities include fabricating and installing awnings and canopies and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects, to set quality standards for materials and execution, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical awning and canopy as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.




A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of awnings and canopies in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Field Measurements: Where awning and canopy installation is indicated to fit to other work, verify dimensions of other work by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for fenestration operation throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and fabricator agree to repair or replace components of awnings and canopies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including framework. b. Deterioration of fabric including seam failure. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

2. Awning and Canopy Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Fabric Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Accent Awnings, Inc. 2. Eide Industries, Inc. 3. Miami Awning Co. 4. Queen City Awning.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design awnings and canopies.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.3 AWNING AND CANOPY FABRICS




1. Herculite. 2. Recasens USA. 3. Safety Components; WeatherMax 4. Sunbrella; a trademark of Glen Raven, Inc.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide awning and canopy fabrics with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products according to test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. 2. Permanently attach label to each awning and canopy fabric indicating whether fabric is

inherently and permanently flame resistant or is treated with flame-retardant chemicals, and whether it requires retreatment after designated time period or cleaning.

C. Design: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Fabric Fiber Content: Solution-dyed acrylic.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 2. Applied Treatment: Stain resistant and mildew resistant, ASTM D 4851.

2.4 AWNING AND CANOPY FRAMES

A. Aluminum Frames: Alloy and temper recommended by awning and canopy manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper required by structural loads.

1. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209. 2. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, standard weight

(Schedule 40) unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 4. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210. 5. Aluminum Finish: Baked-enamel or powder-coat finish complying with finish

manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

B. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, Hardware, and Installation Accessories: Complying with performance requirements indicated and suitable for exposure conditions, supporting structure, anchoring substrates, and installation methods indicated. Corrosion-resistant or noncorrodible units; weather-resistant,compatible, nonstaining materials. Provide as required for awning and canopy assembly, mounting, and secure attachment. Number as needed to comply with performance requirements and to maintain uniform appearance; evenly spaced. Where exposed to view, provide finish and color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

1. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. 2. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts

and, where indicated, flat washers. 3. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when



installed in concrete as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

a. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

4. Adhesive-Bonded Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1512 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

a. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.5 AWNING AND CANOPY FABRICATION

A. Fabrics: Reinforce wear points and hardware attachment points with polypropylene mesh webbing. Seam fabrics in locations indicated on the Drawings and as follows:

1. Fabric Edges and Seams: Manufacturer's standard hemming and seaming methods.

B. Frames: Preassemble awning and canopy frames in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

1. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

2. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Fabricate slip-fit connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

4. Weld corners and connections continuously. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed corners and connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

5. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications in place and to properly transfer loads.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for supporting members, blocking, inserts, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install awnings and canopies at locations and in position indicated, securely connected to supports, free of rack, and in proper relation to adjacent construction. Use mounting methods of types described and in compliance with Shop Drawings and fabricator's written instructions.

B. Install awnings and canopies after other finishing operations, including joint sealing and painting, have been completed.

C. Attach fabric to frames as recommended by fabricator, using lacing method as required to conceal ends of lacing to ensure tight, wrinkle-free fit of fabric to frame.

D. Slip fit frame connections accurately together to form hairline joints, and tighten to secure.

E. Weld frame connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

1. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. c. Remove welding flux immediately. d. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so

no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Anchoring to In-Place Construction: Use anchors, fasteners, fittings, hardware, and installation accessories where necessary for securing awnings and canopies to structural support and for properly transferring load to in-place construction.

G. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

H. Coordinate awning installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and in a manner that prevents exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall and roof assemblies.




A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same or compatible material as used for shop-applied finish painting.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.



METAL CANOPIES 107316 - 1

SECTION 107316 - METAL CANOPIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall-hung canopies.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide a complete, integrated set of canopy manufacturer's standard mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a canopy capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior. Include primary and secondary framing, metal roof panels, and accessories complying with requirements indicated.

1. Provide canopy of size and with spacings, slopes, and spans indicated.


A. Delegated Design: Design manufactured canopy, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Provide canopy capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Design Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Live Loads: Include vertical loads induced by maintenance workers, materials, and

equipment for roof live loads. 3. Roof Snow Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 4. Deflection Limits: Engineer assemblies to withstand design loads with deflections no

greater than the following:

a. Purlins and Rafters: Vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span. b. Metal Roof Panels: Vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span.

C. Seismic Performance: Design and engineer canopies capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7.

D. Thermal Movements: Provide canopy that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.





A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for canopy.

1. Include plans, elevations, and at least 3/4-inch scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, of size below:

1. Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6-inch- long sections of extrusions and squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For manufactured canopy indicated to comply with performance requirements, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for seismic restraints.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of canopy manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain canopy components through one source from a single manufacturer.


1.8 DELIVERY AND HANDLING

A. Deliver canopies in protective covering and crating to protect components and surfaces against damage.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with canopies by field measurements prior to fabrication and indicate on Shop Drawings.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for canopies. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages and other items that are to be embedded in concrete. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



B. Coordinate delivery time so canopies can be installed within 24 hours of receipt at Project site.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal canopies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL-HUNG CANOPIES


1. Dittmer Architectural Aluminum 2. East Coast TVM, LLC 3. Peachtree Protective Covers 4. Mapes Industries, Inc. 5. Tennessee Valley Metals, Inc.

B. General: All sizes and thickness shall be designed and manufactured to meet span requirements and to resist design loads.

C. Deck: Extruded aluminum.

1. Thickness: Min. 0.078 inch. 2. Depth: 3 inches. 3. Width: 6 inches. 4. Interlocking flat bottom to provide flush flat pan appearance from exposed underside.

D. Fascia: Extruded aluminum.

1. Thickness: 0.125 minimum. 2. Depth: 8 inches. 3. Style: J style.

E. Intermediate Framing: Extruded aluminum.

1. Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements.

F. Hanger Rod: Manufacturer's tested and recommended assembly for performance requirements and attachment to structure.

G. Concealed Drainage: Intermediate troughs pitched to drain to gutters at rear of canopies and into downspouts.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are noncorrosive to canopies material and mounting surface.



B. Hardware:

1. Fasteners: Plated non-corrosive Type 18-8 stainless steel, sealed with neoprene "O" rings beneath flat washers.

2. Hanger Rod: Stainless steel, threaded to allow for adjustment to ensure drainage from canopies as indicated.

C. Anchors and Inserts: Use stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts. Use torque-controlled expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability properties of alloy 5005-H15.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy 6061-T6, 6063-T5, and 6063-T6 as required by profile and design.

1. Thickness: As required by design, complying with minimum thickness requirement specified.

C. Aluminum Sheet: Alloy 3105-H28 or 3004-H34.

D. Threaded Rods: Stainless steel, Type 316.


A. General: Provide canopies consisting of extruded aluminum canopies supported on aluminum structural framing system and wall hangers..

1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds without distortion or discoloration of exposed side.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration.

3. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.



B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

C. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify all dimensions existing and provided.

B. Make reasonable adjustments in fabrication and erection to provide acceptable finished canopies.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install canopies in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Set embedded items required for installation of canopies. Use templates furnished by suppliers of items to be attached.

C. Install canopies level, plumb, and at height and slope indicated, with surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

1. Hanger Rod: Attach hanger rod to imbedded anchor plate in accordance with approved shop drawings.

2. Roof Panels:

a. Fabricate roof panels to required lengths. b. Install level and square to beams to avoid "out of square" conditions at beam ends. c. Secure each contact point with a minimum of three stainless steel fasteners with

3/4 inch flat neoprene washers.

3. Joints Sealants and Flashing:

a. Seal fabrication joints and seams away from view where required. b. Seal all other points where water penetration might be expected. c. Properly flash connection to walls where canopies contact surface of building.

1) Note: Sealants are not acceptable for closure/flashing between building and canopy system.

3.3 CLEANING

A. At completion of installation, clean soiled surfaces of canopies according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove protective film from members. Clean canopies of dirt, grease, handprints, and other blemishes. Leave area in a neat, clean, and acceptable condition.

B. Protect canopies from damage from other construction operations. Provide temporary barricades where necessary.



CUPOLA 107423 - 1

SECTION 107423 - CUPOLA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide cupola work shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.


B. Delegated Design: Design cupola assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated, and in accordance with requirements indicated by authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS

C. Section 066100 “Fiberglass-Reinforced-Polyester (FRP) Fabrications” for fiberglass reinforced polyester cupolas.


A. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings designed in accordance with local building code requirements.

B. Samples: Submit color samples of exterior covering.


A. Submit close-out documents, warranties, and manuals.


A. Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts, and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability, and appearance; shall be of best commercial quality for purpose required; and shall comply with approved drawings.


CUPOLA 107423 - 2

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in the manufacture of specified product.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the product for one year after date of completed installation by manufacturer of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Product as manufactured by Campbellsville Industries, Inc., P.O. Box 278, 440 Taylor Blvd., Campbellsville, KY 42718, Phone: 800/467-8135, Fax: 502/465-6839. Website: http://cvilleindustries.com. E-mail: [email protected].

B. Cupola design as shown on drawings.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Structural steel products according to ASTM specifications

B. Structural aluminum products according to the Construction Manual of the Aluminum Association, Inc., and shall be alloy 6061-T6.

C. Aluminum: .032" aluminum cladding, 3003-H14 alloy, with available stock finishes.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate topping ornament true to dimensions, with welded or soldered joints, ground smooth.

B. Form cornices, mouldings, and ornaments in accordance with approved drawings.

C. Cast, stamp, form, and/or spin special ornaments in accordance with good and acceptable practices, and in accordance with approved drawings.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate structural steel framing to conform to AWS standards.

B. Fabricate structural aluminum framing with cold driven aluminum rivets, limiting welding to secondary architectural members.

C. Form all exterior cladding with good and acceptable sheet metal practices, and lock form all seams inasmuch as possible.

D. Conceal all exterior fasteners to maximum possibility.


CUPOLA 107423 - 3

E. Cadmium plated bolts, nuts, and washers for anchoring, unless anchoring materials are provided and installed by others.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Aluminum skin with Kynar 500 finishes, from manufacturer’s stock colors.

B. Shop finish all aluminum castings, stampings, spinnings, and accessories. Units shall be caustic etched, primed with 2 heavy coats of primer, and finished with 2 heavy coats minimum of industrial vinyl or enamel finish electrostatically applied and air dried.

C. Paint all aluminum surfaces in contact with steel with one heavy coat of zinc primer, and paint all steel surfaces with 2 heavy coats red lead or zinc chromate, followed by one coat of aluminized bituminous paint.

2.6 CAULKING

A. Clean and dry all surfaces to be caulked.

B. Apply with caulking gun, using nozzle of proper size to fit the joint width.

C. Silicone caulking by Dow Corning, or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS

A. Verify that site conditions are suitable and accessible for delivery and installation.

B. Confirm that all preparatory work is in place in accordance with approved shop drawings before delivery and installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate with other trades as required to assure proper and adequate installation.

B. Clean all soiled and dirty areas and touch up any scratches or abrasions to finish before lifting into position.

C. Install work with skilled workmen who are familiar with such work in accordance with approved shop drawings.

D. Provide crane for unloading and hoisting product into position.

3.3 CLEAN-UP

A. Clean up all debris caused by work of this Section.


CUPOLA 107423 - 4

B. Keep the premises clean and neat at all times.
